MSC - MSC Patran MSC Nastran Preference Guide - Volume 1 - Structural Analysis [MSC]

C O N T E N T SMSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Prefer-

ence Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

CHAPTER

1Overview ■ Purpose, 2

■ MSC.Nastran Product Information, 3

2Building A Model ■ Introduction to Building a Model, 6

■ Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options, 8

■ Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference, 11

■ Coordinate Frames, 15

■ Finite Elements, 16❑ Nodes, 17❑ Elements, 18❑ Multi-point Constraints, 19

- Degrees of Freedom, 22❑ Superelements, 34

- Select Boundary Nodes, 35

■ Material Library, 36❑ Materials Form, 37

- Isotropic, 42- 2D Orthotropic, 54- 3D Orthotropic, 58- 2D Anisotropic, 59- 3D Anisotropic, 60- Composite, 61- Laminated, 62

■ Element Properties, 63❑ Element Properties Form, 64

- Coupled Point Mass (CONM1), 67- Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 69- Lumped Point Mass (CONM2), 70- Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1), 72- Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1), 73- Bush, 74- General Section Beam (CBAR), 77- P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM), 80- Curved General Section Beam (CBEND), 84- Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND), 86

- Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP), 88- Tapered Beam (CBEAM), 90- General Section (CBEAM), 93- General Section Rod (CROD), 98- General Section Rod (CONROD), 99- Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE), 100- Scalar Spring (CELAS1), 101- Scalar Damper (CDAMP1), 102- Viscous Damper (CVISC), 103- Gap (CGAP), 104- Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 106- PLOTEL, 107- Scalar Bush, 108- Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4), 111- Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR), 113- P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4), 114- Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP), 116- Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP), 117- Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4), 118- Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR), 120- P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4), 122- Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4), 125- Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR), 127- P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4), 128- Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6), 130- Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 131- Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR), 132- P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 133- Standard Membrane (CQUAD4), 135- Revised Membrane (CQUADR), 136- P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4), 137- Shear Panel (CSHEAR), 139- Solid (CHEXA), 140- P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA), 141- Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 143- Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6), 144- Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA), 145

■ Beam Modeling, 146❑ Cross Section Definition, 146❑ Cross Section Orientation, 150❑ Cross Section End Offsets, 151❑ Stiffened Cylinder Example, 152

■ Loads and Boundary Conditions, 153❑ Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 154

- Object Tables, 158

■ Load Cases, 167

■ Defining Contact Regions, 168❑ Contact, 169

3Running an Analysis

■ Review of the Analysis Form, 172❑ Analysis Form, 173❑ Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal, 175

■ Translation Parameters, 176❑ Translation Parameters, 177❑ Numbering Options, 178❑ Select File, 179

■ Solution Types, 180

■ Direct Text Input, 182

■ Solution Parameters, 183❑ Linear Static, 183❑ Nonlinear Static, 186❑ Normal Modes, 188❑ Buckling, 194❑ Complex Eigenvalue, 198❑ Frequency Response, 203❑ Transient Response, 206❑ Nonlinear Transient, 209

■ Subcases, 211❑ Deleting Subcases, 212❑ Editing Subcases, 213

■ Subcase Parameters, 214❑ Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 215❑ Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 216❑ Arc-Length Method Parameters, 218❑ Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, 219❑ Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 221❑ Transient Response Subcase Parameters, 223❑ Frequency Response Subcase Parameters, 226

■ Output Requests, 231❑ Basic Output Requests, 232❑ Advanced Output Requests, 233❑ Edit Output Requests Form, 242❑ Default Output Request Information, 244

- Subcases Direct Text Input, 247

■ Select Superelements, 248

■ Select Explicit MPCs..., 249

■ Subcase Select, 250

■ Restart Parameters, 251

■ Optimize, 254❑ Optimization Parameters, 255❑ Subcases, 256

- Subcase Parameters, 257❑ Subcase Select Optimize, 258

■ Interactive Analysis, 259

❑ Analysis Form, 261❑ Select Modal Results .DBALL, 262❑ Loading Form, 263❑ Create a Field Form, 265❑ Output Selection Form, 266❑ Define Frequencies Form, 267

4Read Results ■ Overview of Reading Results, 270

■ Read Output2, 271

■ Attach XDB, 274

■ Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 277

■ Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities, 285

5Read Input File ■ Review of Read Input File Form, 312

❑ Read Input File Form, 313❑ Entity Selection Form, 314❑ Define Offsets Form, 316❑ Selection of Input File, 317❑ Summary Data Form, 318❑ Reject Card Form, 319

■ Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File, 320❑ Coordinate Systems, 321❑ Grids and SPOINTs, 322❑ Elements and Element Properties, 323❑ Materials, 327❑ MPCs, 328❑ Load Sets, 329❑ TABLES, 331

■ Conflict Resolution, 332❑ Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs, 332❑ Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names, 332

6Delete ■ Review of Delete Form, 334

■ Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job, 335

7Files ■ Files, 338

8Errors/Warnings ■ Errors/Warnings, 342

APreference Configuration and Implementation

■ Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran, 344

■ MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components, 345

■ Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File, 348

INDEX ■ MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, 349Volume 1: Structural Analysis

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

CHAPTER

1 Overview

■ Purpose

■ MSC.Nastran Product Information

1.1 PurposeMSC.Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation. The core of the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several optional products are available including; advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled solvers, and interfaces to third party solvers. This document describes one of these interfaces.

The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface provides a communication link between MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran. It also provides for the customization of certain features in MSC.Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the MSC.Patran system.

Selecting MSC.Nastran as the analysis code preference in MSC.Patran, activates the customization process. These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated for the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface. Specifically, the MSC.Patran forms in these main areas are modified:

• Materials

• Element Properties

• Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing

• Loads and Boundary Conditions

• Analysis Forms

More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and Implementation (App. A).

3CHAPTER 1Overview

1.2 MSC.Nastran Product InformationMSC.Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It is developed, supported, and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation, 815 West Colorado Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90041, (323) 258-9111. See the MSC.Nastran User’s Manual, Volume 1, for a general description of MSC.Nastran’s capabilities.

MSC/PATRAN MSC/NASTRAN Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

CHAPTER

2 Building A Model

■ Introduction to Building a Model

■ Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options

■ Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference

■ Coordinate Frames

■ Finite Elements

■ Material Library

■ Element Properties

■ Beam Modeling

■ Loads and Boundary Conditions

■ Load Cases

■ Defining Contact Regions

2.1 Introduction to Building a ModelThere are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several cases, the forms used to create the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and analysis type. Other parts of the model are created using standard forms.

The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the analysis code (e.g., MSC.Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural).

The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is especially useful if the model is to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as possible will be converted if the analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun. The analysis option defines what will be presented to the user in several areas during the subsequent modeling steps.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2

$# Session file patran.ses.01 started recording at 25$# Recorded by MSC.Patran 03:36:58 PM$# FLEXlm Initialization complete. Acquiring license(s)...

File Group Viewport Display Preferences Tools HelpInsight Control

Geometry© FEM LBCs Matls Properties© ©© © Load Cases© Fields Analysis Results Insight© ©© © XYPlot©

Viewing

Preferences

Analysis...Global...Graphics...

Mouse...Key Map...Picking...

Report...

Geometry...

Finite Element...

Insight...

Hide Icon Help

Main Form...

7CHAPTER 2Building A Model

These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point constraints, the applicable loads and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Type may also affect the allowable selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis Form (Ch. 2) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application.

To use the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application Preference, this should be set to MSC.Nastran.

Indicates the file suffixes used in creating file names for MSC.Nastran input and output files.

The only currently supported Analysis Type for MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran is Structural.

Analysis Preference

MSC.Nastran

Analysis Code:

Structural

Analysis Type:

.bdf

Input File Suffix:

.op2

Output File Suffix:

OK

2.2 Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input OptionsThe following tables summarize all the various MSC.Nastran commands supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more information in this manual on how the commands are supported.

Supported MSC.Nastran File Management Commands

Supported MSC.Nastran Executive Control Commands

Supported MSC.Nastran Case Control Commands

Command Description

ASSIGN An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user specified MSC.Nastran results suffix) to the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file to be created during the analysis.

Command Pages

ECHO 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

SOL 180

TIME 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

Command Pages

ACCELERATION 203, 206

ADACT 13, 215

ADAPT 12, 141

DATAREC 13

DISPLACEMENT 183, 194, 203, 206

ELSDCON 183

ESE 183

FORCE 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206

FREQUENCY 203

GPSTRESS 233

MAXLINES 183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

MPCFORCES 233

Command Pages

OLOAD 183, 194, 203, 206

SPCFORCES 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206

STRAIN 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206

STRESS 183, 188, 194, 201, 203, 206

VECTOR 188, 194

VELOCITY 203, 206

GPSDCON 183

GPFORCE 183

NLLOAD 233

SET 234

SURFACE 234

VOLUME 234


Supported MSC.Nastran Bulk Data Entries

Command Pages

ADAPT 12, 141, 180, 186

BCONP 169

BFRIC 169

BFRIC 169

CBARAO 77

CBAR 77

CBEAM 88, 90

CBEND 84, 86

CDAMP1 73

CDAMP2 177, 326

CELAS1 72

CELAS2 177, 326

CGAP 104

CHEXA 140

CMASS1 106

CMASS2 177, 326

CONM1 67

CONM2 70

CONROD 99

CPENTA 140

CQUAD4 111, 118, 125, 131, 135

CQUAD8 111, 118, 125, 131, 135

CQUADR 113, 120, 127, 132, 136

CROD 98

CSHEAR 139

CTETRA 140

CTRIAX6 130

CTUBE 100

Command Pages

CVISC 103

DYNRED 193

EIGB 196, 191

EIGC 201

EIGR 191

EIGRL 191

FEFACE 11

FEEDGE 11

FORCE 159

FREQ1 203

GMBC 158

GRAV 163

MOMENT 159

MAT1 312

MAT2 312

MAT3 312

MAT8 312

MAT9 312

MPC 23

NLPARM 216

OUTPUT 13, 233

PARAM,AUTOSPC

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

PARAM,INREL

183

PARAM,ALTRED

183

PARAM,COUPMASS

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

PARAM,K6ROT

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

Command Pages

PARAM,WTMASS

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

PARAM,GRDPNT

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

PARAM,LGDISP

186, 209

PARAM,G 198, 203, 206, 209

PARAM,W3 206, 209

PARAM,W4 206, 209

PARAM, POST

176

PBAR 77

PBCOMP 88

PBEAM 90

PBEND 84, 86

PCOMP 116, 117

PDAMP 73

PELAS 72

PGAP 104

PLOAD1 165

PLOAD2 159

PLOAD4 159

PLOADX1 159, 149

PLOTEL 107

PMASS 106

POINT 11, 141

PROD 98

Command Pages

PSHEAR 139

PSHELL 111, 113, 118, 120, 125, 127, 131, 132, 135, 136

PSOLID 140

PTUBE 100

PBEAM 90

PVAL 11, 141

PVISC 103

RBAR 25

RBE1 26

RBE2 27

RBE3 28

RFORCE 163

RROD 29

RSPLINE 30

RTRPLT 31

SESET 34

SPC1 158

SPCD 158

TEMP 161

TEMPF 146

TEMPRB 161

TEMPP1 161

TIC 164, 164

TSTEP 206

TSTEPNL 209, 219


2.3 Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran PreferenceIn Version 68 of MSC.Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid elements. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some fundamental differences in approach to model building and results import for p-element analyses; this section will serve as a guide to these.

MSC.Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analysis in two areas. Shell and beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linear dynamic solution sequences. MSC.Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities.

Element Creation. MSC.Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid CTETRA, CPENTA, and CHEXA elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA, and QUAD elements; beams BAR elements. MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran allow TET4, TET10, TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15, WEDGE52, HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for 2D-solids and membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive analysis for beams. The preferred approach, when beginning a new model, is to use the higher-order elements--HEX64, WEDGE52, TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The support for lower-order elements is provided primarily to support existing models. The higher-order cubic elements allow more accurate definition of the geometry and more accurate postprocessing of results from the MSC.Nastran analysis.The translator generates the appropriate MSC.Nastran FEEDGE and POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-elements. Models with HEX64 and WEDGE52 elements are easily created with the MSC.Patran Iso Mesher; models with TET16 elements can be created with the Tet Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13 elements can be created using the Iso Mesher or the Paver.

For p-elements, MSC.Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic edge consists of two vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not necessarily C1 continuous. If the original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce kinks which cause false stress concentrations. Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results especially for thin curved shells.

In Version 7 of MSC.Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge are adjusted so that the edges of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3Nas translator. After the Pat3Nas translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the MSC.Patran database has changed. The user is informed with a warning message. The user can turn the adjustment of midside nodes ON and OFF with the environment variable PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midside nodes are adjusted to make the adjacent elements C1 continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a cubic edge are not adjusted.

MSC.Patran generates the input for MSC.Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE bulk data entries with POINTs are written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge in MSC.Nastran. The points generated by MSC.Patran must not be moved. Therefore, a parameter entry PARAM, PEDGEP, 1 is written by MSC.Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that incoming POINTs are not moved in MSC.Nastran. The default is PEDGEP= 0, MSC.Nastran will move the two POINTs to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge. The C1 continuous cubic edges improve the accuracy of p-element results.

In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested to determine the quality of shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very good when exact geometry was used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results within single precision accuracy.

Element and p-Formulation Properties. Both element and p-formulation properties are defined using the Element Properties application by choosing Action: Create, Dimension: 1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel/2D Solid/Membrane/ or Solid, and p-Formulation on the main form. The details of the property form for this case are described on (p. 141). Most of the properties are optional and have defaults; the material property name is required.

Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders. These properties specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three spatial directions. Although these are integer values, in MSC.Patran, each property is defined using the MSC.Patran vector definition. At first, this may seem peculiar, but it gives the user access to many useful tools in the MSC.Patran system for defining and manipulating these properties. Typically, a user would define these properties with a syntax like <3 4 2> to prescribe polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions. MSC.Patran will convert these values to floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference will interpret them. This vector syntax is convenient primarily because it allows these properties to be defined using the Fields application. In a case where the material properties are constant over the model, but it is desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-orders, vector fields can be defined and specified in a single property definition. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference will provide additional help for this modeling function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when results are imported, vector, spatial fields will optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each element for each adaptive cycle. To repeat a single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify the element properties by selecting the appropriate field.

A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the vicinity of stress singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g., sharp corners), boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point forces). Sometimes it is easier to tell the adaptive analysis to “ignore” these singular regions than it is to change the model. This can be done by setting the Maximum P-orders property for elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1> or <2 2 2>. These elements are sometimes called “sacrificial” elements.

Loads and Boundary Conditions. It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and constraints cause the stress field in the body to become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must be taken in finite element creation and loads application to ensure that these artificial high-stress regions don’t dominate the analysis.

Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or distributed displacements. There are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements. The Element Uniform and Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement constraints to be applied to the faces of solid elements. If the elements are p-elements, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are produced. If applied to non-p-elements, the appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced.

Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam elements. Distributed loads can be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure loads can be applied to the faces of p-shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either the nodes or the elements.


Analysis Definition. Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in Version 68 of MSC.Nastran; both solution types are supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference. Only a few parameters on the Analysis forms may need to be changed for p-element analyses. If running a version of MSC.Nastran prior to Version 68.2 (i.e., Version 68, or 68.1), the OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation Parameters form must be set to Alter File in order to process the results in MSC.Patran. The Solution Parameters forms for the linear static and normal modes analyses contain a Max p-Adaptive Cycles option, which is defaulted to 3. The Subcase Parameters form under Subcase Create has options to limit the participation of this subcase in the adaptive error analysis. Finally, the Advanced Output Requests form under Subcase Create has an option to define whether results are to be produced for all adaptive cycles or only every nth adaptive cycle.

Results Import and Postprocessing. Two different approaches are provided for postprocessing results from MSC.Nastran p-element analyses. Both approaches rely on MSC.Nastran creating results for a “VU mesh” where each p-element is automatically subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard approach with the default MSC.Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements) for beams, the results will automatically be mapped onto the MSC.Patran nodes and elements during import. This mapping will occur for all 10, MSC.Patran solid element topologies mentioned above. The most accurate mapping and postprocessing takes place when results are mapped to the higher-order MSC.Patran elements.

When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more elements beyond 3, the 3 x 3 x 3 VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In this case, a user can specify a higher-order VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MSC.Nastran OUTRCV entry and then import both model data and results entities into a new, empty MSC.Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh and results are imported directly, rather than mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. The OUTRCV entry is currently supported only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translation Parameters form.

It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g., fringe plots) may be discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU grids generated by MSC.Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are coincident nodes and a result associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an Equivalence operation to remove these coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent postprocessing operations will likely be incorrect.

For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycle in the analysis. The result types in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output Request form. By default, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means that output quantities specific to p-elements will be written only for the last cycle. If postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is desired, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option should be set equal to one.

One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence of selected quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting capability under the Results application.

Potential Pitfalls. There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing correct p-element models for MSC.Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in the MSC.Patran higher order-elements. These nodes are used in p-element analysis only for defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are not associated with these nodes. Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign loads or boundary

conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertently is if a nodal force is applied to the face of a MSC.Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point force at every node (including the midside nodes) on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load should instead be applied as an element uniform or element variable pressure.

Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models. Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, p-element analysis is relatively straightforward. The first step is to read the NASTRAN input file into MSC.Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model may contain any combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa elements. The second step is to use the Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid properties from Standard Formulation to P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation solids has many options specific to p-element analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This property modification step is the only change that must be made before submitting the model for analysis.

Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls (p. 13), it is appropriate to modify the types of loads and boundary conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models, displacement constraints are applied using MSC.Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In p-element analyses, element-oriented displacement constraints are more appropriate. Existing displacement LBCs can be modified using the Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC type is nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element Uniform or Element Variable displacement constraints are more appropriate. The application region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of element faces. As described above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible, it is beneficial to redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face. If this is not possible, an alternative is to limit the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be done by defining a new element property for these elements and defining the Maximum P-orders vector appropriately. Element pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined in the original model need not be changed for the p-element analysis.


2.4 Coordinate FramesCoordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data entry, depending on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID assigned in MSC.Patran. The RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate frame construction method used in MSC.Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields are derived from the coordinate frame definition in MSC.Patran.

Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or loads and boundary conditions can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 350) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling.

To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or not, set the environment variable “WRITE_ALL_COORDS” to ON.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

2.5 Finite ElementsThe Finite Elements Application in MSC.Patran allows the definition of basic finite element construction. Created under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point constraints, and Superelement.

For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and Mesh Forms (p. 29) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing


NodesNodes in MSC.Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MSC.Nastran. Nodes can be created either directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node has associated Reference (CP) and Analysis (CD) coordinate frames. The ID is taken directly from the assigned node ID. The X1, X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate frame. If no reference frame is assigned, the global system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the GRID entry are left blank.

Finite Elements

Create Action:

Node Object:

Edit Method:

1

Node Id List

Coord 0

Analysis Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Associate with Geometry

Node Location List

Auto Execute

-Apply-

The analysis frame (CD of the GRID) is the coordinate system in which the displacements, degrees of freedom, constraints, and solution vector are defined.

The coordinate system in which the node location is defined (CP of the GRID) can be either the reference coordinate frame, the analysis coordinate frame, or a global reference (blank), depending on the value of the forward translation parameter “Node Coordinates.”

[0 0 0]

ElementsThe Finite Elements Application in MSC.Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for standard finite elements. The type of MSC.Nastran element to be created is not determined until the element properties are assigned. See the Element Properties Form (p. 64) for details concerning the MSC.Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the Element object, or indirectly using the Mesh object.

Finite Elements

Create Action:

Mesh Object:

SurfaceType:

1

Node Id List

Element Id List

Output Ids

0.1

Global Edge Length

Quad5Quad8

Element Topology

IsoMesh Paver

Mesher

IsoMesh Parameters...

Surface List

-Apply-

Elements not referenced by an element property region that is understood by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran forward translator will not be translated.

Quad4

Node Coordinate Frames...

1

◆ ◆◆


Multi-point ConstraintsMulti-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Application. These are special element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The forms for creating MPCs are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements form. The full functionality of the MPC forms are defined in The Create Action (FEM Entities).

MPC Types. To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option menu. The MPC types that appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the Analysis Code and Analysis Type preferences. The following table describes the MPC types which are supported for MSC.Nastran.

MPC Type Analysis Type Description

Explicit Structural Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of freedom and one or more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree of freedom. An unlimited number of independent terms can be specified, while only one dependent term can be specified. The constant term is not allowed in MSC.Nastran.

Linear Surf-Vol

Structural Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear 3D solid element to connect the plate element to the solid element. One dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a single node.

Finite Elements

Create Action:

MPC Object:

Explicit Type:

1

MPC ID

Constant Term

Define Terms...

Used to specify the ID to associate to the MPC when it is created.

Finite Elements

Create Action:

MPC Object:

Explicit Type:

1

MPC ID

Define Terms...

Rigid (Fixed)

Structural Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or more dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of dependent terms can be specified, while only one independent term can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RBAR Structural Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RBE1 Structural Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to an arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. Any number of independent terms can be specified as long as the total number of degrees of freedom specified in all of the independent terms adds up to six. Since at least one degree of freedom must be specified for each term there is no way the user can create more that six independent terms. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RBE2 Structural Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only specify one dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RBE3 Structural Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference node as the weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which are added to the m-set. An arbitrary number of independent terms can also be specified. Each independent term consists of a constant coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of freedom. There is no constant term for this MPC type.



RROD Structural Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between two nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is specified, which consists of a node and a single translational degree of freedom. One independent term is specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RSPLINE Structural Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the displacements of a set of independent nodes to define the displacements at a set of dependent nodes using elastic beam equations. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each dependent term consists of a node, a list of degrees of freedom, and a sequence number. An arbitrary number of independent nodes (minimum of two) can be specified. Each independent term consists of a node and a sequence number. The sequence number is used to order the dependent and independent terms with respect to each other. The only restriction is that the first and the last terms in the sequence must be independent terms. A constant term, called D/L Ratio, must also be specified.

RTRPLT Structural Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the three independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the three nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

Cyclic Symmetry

Structural Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of the model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen, such as “SOL 114,” then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are created. If a solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic symmetric is chosen, such as “SOL 101,” MPC and SPC cards are created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the analysis coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could erroneously change the meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element properties.

Sliding Surface

Structural Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the NASTRAN input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option automatically redefines the analysis coordinate references of all affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element properties.


Degrees of Freedom

Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox containing the valid degrees of freedom is displayed on the form.

The following degrees of freedom are supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran MPCs for the various analysis types:

Degree of freedom Analysis Type

UX Structural

UY Structural

UZ Structural

RX Structural

RY Structural

RZ Structural

Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for an MPC actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only to solid structural elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom. However, MSC.Patran will allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this node when defining an MPC.


Explicit MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran MPC Bulk Data entry. The difference in explicit MPC equations between MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran will result in the A1 field of the MSC.Nastran entry being set to -1.0.

Define Terms

Dependent Terms (1)

Independent Terms (No Max)

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

Node 12

Node List

Auto Execute

UY

DOFs

UX

UZ

Holds the dependent term information. This term will define the fields for G1 and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one node and DOF combination may be defined for any given explicit MPC. The A1 field on the MPC entry is automatically set to -1.0.

Holds the independent term information. These terms define the Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the MPC entry, where i is greater than one. As many coefficient, node, and DOF combinations as desired may be defined.

Coefficient Nodes (1) DOF (1)

UY

UZ

71.

-3.4000> 12

Nodes (1) DOFs (1)

UX14

Apply Clear Cancel

Coefficient = -3.4

◆

◆◆ ◆◆

◆◆

Rigid (Fixed)

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry. The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456.

Define Terms

Dependent Terms (No Max)

Independent Terms (1)

Node 4

Node List

Auto Execute

CancelClear Apply

Nodes (1)

Nodes (1)

14

10

6

4

Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms.

Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

◆ ◆◆

◆◆◆◆


RBAR MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RBAR Bulk Data entry and defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the Dependent Terms and the Independent Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The total number of referenced nodes, however, must be 2. If either or both of these lists references 2 nodes, then there must be an overlap in the list of referenced nodes.

Define Terms

Dependent Terms (Min =1, Max = 2)

Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 2)

Node 2

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel

Nodes (1) DOFs (Max=6)

1 UX

Nodes (1) DOFs (Max =6)

Holds the dependent term information. Either one or two nodes may be defined as having dependent terms. The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry. The DOFs define the CMA and CMB fields.

Holds the independent term information. Either one or two nodes may be defined as having independent terms.The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry.The DOFs define the CNA and CNB fields.

UXUYUZ

1

2

UY UZ RX

UX UY UZ

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete◆

◆◆◆◆

◆◆

RBE1 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RBE1 Bulk Data entry.

Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE1 entry. An unlimited number of nodes and DOFs may be defined here.

Holds the independent term information. Defines the GNi and CNi fields on the RBE1 entry. The total number of Node/DOF pairs defined must equal 6, and be capable of representing any general rigid body motion.

Define Terms


Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 6)

Node 2

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel


1 UX UZ

Nodes (1) DOFs (Max =6)

UXUY

1

2

UY UZ RX

UX UY UZ

UZ

1

12

UY RY RZ

UX

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

◆◆◆

◆◆◆◆


RBE2 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry.

Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi and CM fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms.

Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.

Define Terms

Dependent Terms (1)


Node 1,10:14:2,15,16

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel

Nodes (No Max) DOFs (Max=6)

1,10,:14:2,15> UX UZ

UXUYUZ

8

Nodes (1)

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

◆◆◆

◆◆◆◆

RBE3 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MSC.Nastran RBE3 Bulk Data entry.

Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE3 entry. The first dependent term will be treated as the reference node, REFGRID and REFC. The rest of the dependent terms become the GMi and CMi components.

Holds the independent term information. Defines the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi fields on the RBE3 entry.

Define Terms



Node 7 8

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel


10 UX UY UZ RX

UXUYUZ

11 UX UY UZ RX

Coefficient Nodes (No Max) DOF (Max=6)

UX UY UZ

UX

1:5:21.

4.69999> 2:6:2

Coefficient = 5.2

5.19999> 7,8 UY

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete◆

◆◆ ◆◆

◆◆


RROD MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RROD Bulk Data entry.

Define Terms

Dependent Terms (1)


Node 1

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel

Nodes (1) DOFs (1)

1 UY

UZ

UXUY

Nodes (1)

2

Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GB and CMB on the RROD entry. Only one translational DOF may be referenced for this entry.

Holds the independent term information. Defines the GA field on the RROD entry. The CMA field is left blank.

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

◆◆◆

◆◆◆◆

RSPLINE MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RSPLINE Bulk Data entry. The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This MPC type is typically used to tie together two dissimilar meshes.

Define Terms



Node 5

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel

UXUYUZ

5Sequence =

Holds the independent term information. Terms with the highest and lowest sequence numbers must be independent.

DOFs (MAX=6)Sequence Nodes (1)

2 2 UX UY U>

4 4 UX UY U>

5 5 UX UY U>

Sequence Nodes (1)

1

3

6

1

3

6

Holds the dependent term information.

Determines what sequence the independent and dependent terms will be written to the RSPLINE entry.

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

◆◆◆

◆◆◆◆


RTRPLT MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC.Nastran RTRPLT Bulk Data entry.

Define Terms

Dependent Terms (Min= 1, Max= 3)

Independent Terms (Min= 1, Max= 3))

Node 3

Node List

Auto Execute

DOFs

Apply Clear Cancel

UXUYUZ

Nodes(1) DOFs (MAX=6)

1

2

3

RX RY

UX UY

UX UY

Nodes (1) DOFs (MAX=6)

1

2

3

UX UY UZ RZ

UZ

UZ

Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CMA, CMB, and CMC fields of the RTRPLT entry.

Holds the independent term information. The total number of nodes referenced in both the dependent terms and the independent terms must equal three. There must be exactly six independent degrees of freedom, and they must be capable of describing rigid body motion. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry.

Create Dependent

Create Independent

Modify

Delete

◆◆◆

◆◆◆◆

Cyclic Symmetry MPCs

The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYAX, and CYSYM entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters (p. 183), or into SPC and MPC entries if the requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric.

If the type selected is Cyclic Symmetry, the type of symmetry will always be rotational.

NOTE: MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate references on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties.

Finite Elements

Create Action:

MPC Object:

Cyclic Symmetry Type:

1

MPC ID

0.005

Node Comparison Tolerance

Cylindrical Coord. Frame

Dependent Region

Independent Region

Auto Execute

-Apply-

Side 2 of the CYJOIN entries.

Any node lying on the Z axis will be automatically written to the CYAX entry.

Side 1 of the CYJOIN entries.


Sliding Surface MPCs

The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MPCs in the NASTRAN input file.

If a Sliding Surface type is used, note that this MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate references on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties.

Finite Elements

CreateAction:

MPCObject:

Sliding SurfaceType:

1

MPC ID

0.005

Node Comparison Tolerance

Automatic

User Specified

Normal Coord. Frame Option

Coordinate Frame

Axis 1

Axis 2

Axis 3

Normal Axis

Dependent Region

Independent Region

Auto Execute

-Apply-

◆

◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

SuperelementsIn superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These smaller pieces of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structures by reducing their stiffness matrix, mass matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the boundary nodes and then combined to solve for the whole structure. The first step in creating a superelement is to create a MSC.Patran group (using Group/Create) that contains the elements in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite Elements application on the Create/ Superelement form.

Finite Elements

-Apply-

CreateAction:

SuperelementObject:

Select Boundary Nodes...

Superelement_1

Superelement List

Superelement_1

Superelement Name

Left Wing of DC-10

Superelement Description

Group_Superelement_1

Element Definition Group

List of existing superelements.

The group containing all the elements that define a superelement. Note that the group must contain elements not just nodes. If a group does not contain elements, it will not show up in the Element Definition Group listbox.

Brings up an optional subordinate form that allows a user to select boundary nodes of the superelement. By default, the common nodes between the elements in the group and the rest of the model are selected as the boundary nodes.


Select Boundary Nodes


Get Default Boundary Nodes


Add Remove

Selected Boundary Nodes

OK Clear

Selecting this option adds the common nodes between the Element Definition Group and the rest of the model to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Allows for manual selection of boundary nodes.

Remove selected nodes from the Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Add selected nodes to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.

2.6 Material LibraryThe Materials form will appear when the Material toggle, located on the MSC.Patran application selections, is chosen. The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material form appears, and ultimately, which MSC.Nastran material will be created.

The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of all the material property definitions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference.

Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up will be translated. References to externally defined materials will result in special comments in the NASTRAN input file, e.g., materials that property values that are not defined in MSC.Patran.

The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran forward translator will perform material type conversions when needed. This applies to both constant material properties and temperature-dependent material properties. For example, a three-dimensional orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA elements will be converted into a three-dimensional anisotropic material.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing


Materials FormThis form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials form is used to provide options to create the various MSC.Nastran materials.

This toggle defines the basic material directionality and can be set to Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic, 3D Anisotropic, or Composite.

Defines the material name. A unique material ID will be assigned during translation.

Materials

Create

Isotropic

Filter*

Existing Materials

Material Names

DATE: 01-Apr-92

Description

Code:

Type:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Input Properties...

Change Material Status...

Action:

Object:

Lists the existing materials with the specified directionality.

Describes the material that is being created.

Generates a form that is used to define the material properties.

Indicates the active analysis code and analysis type. These selections are made on the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Generates a form that is used to indicate the active portions of the material model. By default, all portions of a created material model are active.

Method: Manual Input

Time: 17:08:02

The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Isotropic ❏ Linear Elastic

❏ Nonlinear Elastic

❏ Hyperelastic ❏ Nearly Incompressible

❏ Test Data

❏ Coefficients

- Mooney Rivlin

123

❏ Elastoplastic ❏ Stress/Strain Curve

❏ von Mises - Isotropic- Kinematic- Combined

❏ Tresca - Isotropic- Kinematic- Combined

❏ Mohr-Coulomb - Isotropic- Kinematic- Combined

❏ Drucker-Prager - Isotropic- Kinematic- Combined

❏ Hardening Slope ❏ von Mises - Isotropic- Kinematic- Combined




❏ Failure ❏ n/a

❏ Hill

❏ Hoffman

❏ Tsai-Wu

❏ Maximum Strain

❏ Creep ❏ Tabular Input

❏ Creep Law 111

❏ Creep Law 112

❏ Creep Law 121

❏ Creep Law 122

❏ Creep Law 211

❏ Creep Law 212

❏ Creep Law 221

❏ Creep Law 222

❏ Creep Law 300


2D Orthotropic

❏ Linear Elastic

3D Orthotropic

❏ Linear Elastic

2D Anisotropic

❏ Linear Elastic





❏ Drucker-Prager

- Isotropic- Kinematic- Combined





❏ Failure ❏ n/a

❏ Hill

❏ Hoffman

❏ Tsai-Wu

❏ Maximum Strain



❏ Creep Law 111

❏ Creep Law 112

❏ Creep Law 121

❏ Creep Law 122

❏ Creep Law 211

❏ Creep Law 212

❏ Creep Law 221

❏ Creep Law 222

❏ Creep Law 300

3D Anisotropic

❏ Linear Elastic





❏ Drucker-Prager





❏ Drucker-Prager





❏ Creep Law 111

❏ Creep Law 112

❏ Creep Law 121

❏ Creep Law 122

❏ Creep Law 211

❏ Creep Law 212

❏ Creep Law 221

❏ Creep Law 222

❏ Creep Law 300

Composite ❏ Laminate

❏ Rule of Mixtures

❏ HAL Cont. Fiber

❏ HAL Disc. Fiber

❏ HAL Cont. Ribbon

❏ HAL Disc. Ribbon

❏ HAL Particulate

❏ Short Fiber 1D

❏ Short Fiber 2D


Isotropic

Linear Elastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and Isotropic is selected on the Material form and when Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the linear elasticity values and other miscellaneous values for an Isotropic material. The translator will produce MAT1 entry.

Input Options

Linear ElasticConstitutive Model:

Property Name Value

Current Constitutive Models:

-Apply- Clear Cancel

Elastic Modulus =

Poisson’s Ratio =

Density =

Thermal Expansion Coeff =

Structural Damping Coeff =

Reference Temperature =

Shear Modulus =


Nonlinear Elastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, Isotropic is the selected Object, and Nonlinear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the MATS1 entry. A stress-strain table defined using the Fields application can be selected on this form. Based on this information the translator will produce MATS1 and TABLES1 entries.

Input Options

Nonlinear ElasticConstitutive Model:

Property Name Value



Stress/Strain Curve =

Hyperelastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and one of the following is the selected Object.

Use this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP and TABLES1 entries.

Isotropic

Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Hyperelastic Nearly Incompressible

Test Data Mooney Rivlin 1, 2, 3

Coefficients

Input Options

HyperelasticConstitutive Model:

Nearly IncompressibleComressibility:

Test DataData Type:

Mooney RivlinStrain Energy Potential:

OK Clear Cancel


1Order of Polynomial:

Property Name Value

Tension/compresion TAB1 =

Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 =

Simple Shear Data TAB3 =

Pure Shear Data TAB4 =

Pure Vol. compression TABD =


Hyperelastic


Use this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP.

Isotropic

Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Hyperelastic Nearly Incompressible

Test Data Mooney Rivlin 1, 2, 3

Coefficients

Input Options

HyperelasticConstitutive Model:

Nearly IncompressibleComressibility:

CoefficientsData Type:

Mooney RivlinStrain Energy Potential:

OK Clear Cancel

1Order of Polynomial:

Property Name Value

Distortional Def. Coef. A10 =

Distorional Def. Coef. A01 =

Vol. Deformation Coef. D1=

Density RHO=

Vol. Thermal Exp. Coef. AV =


Reference Temp. TREF =

Structural Damp. Coeff GE =

Elastoplastic


Use this form to define the data describing plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries.

Isotropic 2D Anisotropic 3D Anisotropic

Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4

Elastoplastic Stress/Strain Curve von Mises Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Tresca Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Input Options

Elastoplastic Constitutive Model:

Stress/Strain Curve Nonlinear Data Input:

Von Mises Yield Function:

Isotropic Hardening Rule:


Property Name Value




Elastoplastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form when one of the following is the selected Object.

Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries.



Elastoplastic Stress/Strain Curve Mohr-Coulomb Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Drucker-Prager Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Input Options


Stress/Strain Curve Nonlinear Data Input:

Mohr-Coulomb Yield Function:


Property Name Value



Internal Friction Angle =


Elastoplastic


Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on an MATS1 entries.

Isotropic Isotropic 2D Anisotropic


Elastoplastic Hardening Slope von Mises Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Tresca Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Input Options


Hardening Slope Nonlinear Data Input:

Von Mises Yield Function:


Property Name Value



Yield Point =

Hardening Slope =


Elastoplastic


Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on an MATS1 entries.



Elastoplastic Hardening Slope Mohr-Coulomb Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Drucker-Prager Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined

Input Options

ElastoplasticConstitutive Model:

Hardening SlopeNonlinear Data Input:

Mohr-CoulombYield Function:

IsotropicHardening Rule:

Property Name Value



Yield Point =

Hardening Slope =

Internal Friction Angle =

Failure


Use this form to define the failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional anisotropic material. This data appears in the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries.

Isotropic 2D Anisotropic

Option 1 Option 2

Failure n/a

Input Options

FailureConstitutive Model:

n/aComposite Failure Theory:

Property Name Value



Compression Stress Limit =

Tension Stress Limit =

Shear Stress Limit =


Failure


Use this form to define the failure criteria of the isotropic and two-dimensional anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT1 and PCOMP entries.

Isotropic 2D Anisotropic

Option 1 Option 2

Failure Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain

Input Options


HillComposite Failure Theory:

Property Name Value



Compression Stress Limit =

Tension Stress Limit =


Bonding Shear Stress Limit =

Creep


Use this form to define the primary stiffness, primary damping, and secondary damping for a creep model with tabular input. This data appears on the CREEP entry.


Option 1 Option 2

Creep Tabular

Input Options

CreepConstitutive Model:

Property Name Value



Creep Reference Temp =

Creep Threshold Factor =

Temp. Dependence Exponent =

Primary Creep Stiffness =

Primary Creep Damping =

Tabular InputCreep Data Input:

Secondary Creep Damping =


Creep


Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available in MSC.Nastran. This data appears on the CREEP entry.


Option 1 Option 2

Creep Creep Law 111, 112,121,122, 211, 212, 221, 222, 300

Input Options

CreepConstitutive Model:

Property Name Value



Creep Reference Temp. =

Creep Threshold Factor =

Temp. Dependence Exponent

Coefficient B =

Coefficient C =

Coefficient D =

Coefficient E =

Coefficient F =

Coefficient A =

Creep Law 111Creep Data Input:

Coefficient G =

2D Orthotropic

Linear Elastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties, and other miscellaneous data for a two dimensional Orthotropic material. The data appears on MAT8 entries.

Input Options


Property Name Value



Elastic Modulus 22 =


Poisson’s Ratio 12 =

Shear Modulus 12 =

Shear Modulus 13 =

Density =

Thermal Expansion Coef 11=

Thermal Expansion Coef 22 =

Structural Damping Coef =

Shear Modulus 23 =



Failure

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form and 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object.

Use this form to define the failure criteria for a 2D Orthotropic material. The data appears in the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields of the MAT8 entry.

Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Failure Stress n/a

Strain n/a

Input Options

Failure Constitutive Model:

Property Name Value



Tension Stress Limit 11 =


Compress Stress Limit 11 =



StressFailure Limits:

n/a Composite Failure Theory:

Failure


Use this form to define the failure criteria of a two-dimensional orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT8 and PCOMP entries.


Failure Stress Hill, Hoffman

Strain Hill, Hoffman

Input Options


Property Name Value









Hill Composite Failure Theory:



Failure


Use this form to define the failure criteria of a two-dimensional orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT8 and PCOMP entries.


Failure Stress Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain

Strain Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain

Input Options


Property Name Value









Tsai-WuComposite Failure Theory:


Interaction Term =

3D Orthotropic

Linear Elastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 3D Orthotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other miscellaneous data for a 3D Orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT3 entries if the material is used with axisymmetric solid elements or MAT9 entries if the material is used with 3D solid element (CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) entries.

Input Options


Property Name Value






Poisson Ratio 12 =

Poisson Ratio 31 =

Shear Modulus 12 =

Shear Modulus 23 =

Shear Modulus 31 =

Density =

Thermal Expansion Coeff 11=

Poisson Ratio 23 =




2D Anisotropic

Linear Elastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 2D Anisotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other miscellaneous data for a 2D plane stress Anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT2 entries.

Input Options


Property Name Value


Stiffness 12 =

Stiffness 11 =

Stiffness 13 =

Stiffness 22 =

Stiffness 33 =

Density =

Thermal Expansion Coef 11=



Structural Damping Coef =

Stiffness 23 =



3D Anisotropic

Linear Elastic

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, 3D Anisotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other miscellaneous data for a 3D Anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT9 entries.

Input Options


Property Name Value



Stiffness 12 =

Stiffness 11 =

Stiffness 13 =

Stiffness 14 =

Stiffness 16 =

Stiffness 22 =

Stiffness 23 =

Stiffness 24 =

Stiffness 25 =

Stiffness 15 =

Stiffness 26 =

Stiffness 33 =

Stiffness 34 =


Composite

The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic properties of materials. All the composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a homogeneous elastic material in MSC.Nastran.

When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this material is then referenced in a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, a PCOMP entry is created. However, if this material is referenced by a different type of element property region, for example, “Revised or Standard Homogeneous Plate,” then the equivalent homogeneous material properties are used instead of the laminate lay-up data. Only materials created through the Laminated Composite option should be referenced by a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region. Refer to Composite Materials Construction (p. 72) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Laminated

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form, Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to define the laminate lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is referenced in a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, then an MSC.Nastran PCOMP entry containing the lay-up data is written. If the resulting material is referenced by any other type of element property region, the equivalent homogeneous properties of the material are used.

Laminated Composite

TotalStacking Sequence Convention Offset

Insert Material Names

Load Text Into Spreadsheet

Insert

Text Entry Mode

Material Names

Thicknesses

Orientations

Delete Selected Rows

Stacking Sequence Definition: Select an Existing Material.

Show Laminate Properties... Clear Text and Data Boxes

Material Name Thickness Orientation

◆

◆◆◆◆


2.7 Element PropertiesThe Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating element properties. The selections made on the Element Properties menu will determine which element property form appears, and ultimately, which MSC.Nastran element will be created.

The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and details of all the element property definitions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

Element Properties FormThis form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There are four option menus on this form. Each will determine which MSC.Nastran element type will be created and which property forms will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this section. For a full description of this form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Use this option menu to define the element’s dimension. The options are:

0D (point elements)

1D (bar elements)

2D (tri and quad elements)

3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements)

This option menu depends on the selection made in the Dimension option menu. Use this menu to define the general type of element, such as:

Mass Versus Grounded Spring

Shell Versus 2D_Solid

These option menus may or may not be presented, and their contents depend heavily on the selections made in Dimension and Type. See Table 2-1 for more help.

Element Properties

CreateAction:

2DDimension:

Type:

Option (s):

Standard Formulation

Existing Property Sets

Select Members

Add Remove

Application Region

Application Region

Apply

Homogeneous

Shell

Input Properties...

Property Set Name


The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Structural.

Table 2-1 Structural Options

Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2

0D ❏ Mass ❏ Coupled

❏ Grounded

❏ Lumped

❏ Grounded Spring

❏ Grounded Damper

❏ Grounded Bush

1D ❏ Beam ❏ General Section ❏ Standard

❏ Curved w/General Section

❏ Curved w/Pipe Section

❏ Lumped Section

❏ Tapered Section ❏ Standard

❏ P-element

❏ Rod ❏ General Section

❏ Pipe Section

❏ Standard

❏ CONROD

❏ Spring

❏ Damper ❏ Scalar

❏ Viscous

❏ Gap

❏ 1D Mass

❏ PLOTEL

❏ Scalar Bush

2D ❏ Shell ❏ Homogeneous ❏ Standard

❏ Revised

❏ P-element

❏ Laminate ❏ Standard

❏ Revised

❏ Equivalent Section ❏ Standard

❏ Revised

❏ P-element

2D (continued)

❏ Bending Panel ❏ Standard

❏ Revised

❏ P-element

❏ 2D-Solid ❏ Axisymmetric

❏ Plane Strain ❏ Standard

❏ Revised

❏ P-Formulation

❏ Hyperelastic Formulation

❏ Membrane ❏ Standard

❏ Revised

❏ Shear Panel

3D ❏ Solid ❏ Standard

❏ P-Formulation

❏ Hyperelastic Formulation

Table 2-1 Structural Options

Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2


Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen.

Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric point of the structural model.

Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies

Create 0D Mass Coupled Point/1

Input Properties

Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)

Property Name Value Value Type

Mass Orientation

Mass Component 1,1

Mass Component 2,1

Mass Component 2,2

Mass Component 3,1

Mass Component 3,2

CID

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. The value is a reference to an existing coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a non rectangular coordinate system is specified, the system will be evaluated into a local rectangular system, which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This property is the CID field on the CONM1 entry. This property is optional.

Defines the values of the mass matrix. These properties are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry and can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined.

OK

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Prop Name Description

Mass Component 3,3

Mass Component 4,1

Mass Component 4,2

Mass Component 4,4

Mass Component 5,1

Mass Component 5,2

Mass Component 5,3

Mass Component 5,4

Mass Component 5,5

Mass Component 6,1

Mass Component 6,2

Mass Component 6,3

Mass Component 6,4

Mass Component 6,5

Mass Component 6,6

Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry. These properties can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined.


Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)


Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node is defined to be grounded.

Action DimensionType Option(s) Topologies

Create 0D Mass Grounded Point/1

Input Properties

Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)


Mass

Dof at Node 1

Real Scalar

Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This is the M field on the PMASS entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to. This property can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1 field on the CMASS1 entry. This property is required.

OK

String

Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)


Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a geometric point of the structural model.


Create 0D Mass Lumped Point/1

Input Properties

Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)


Mass

[Mass Orient. CID/CG]

[Mass Offset]

[Inertia 1,1]

[Inertia 2,1]

[Inertia 2,2]

Real Scalar

CID

Vector

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Defines the translational mass value to be used. This is the M field on the CONM2 entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. This is a reference to an existing coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a nonrectangular coordinate system is specified, the system will be evaluated into a local rectangular system, which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This is the CID field on the CONM2 entry. If the Value Type is set to Vector then the components of the vector define the center of gravity of the mass in the basic coordinate system and the field for CID is translated as -1. This property is optional.

Defines an offset from the specified node to where the lumped mass actually is to exist in the structural mode. This vector is defined in the Mass Orientation coordinate system. Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the CONM2 entry. This property is optional.

Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These properties are the Iij fields on the CONM2 record. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.

OK


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM2 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Inertia 3,1

Inertia 3,2

Inertia 3,3

Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These are the Iij fields on the CONM2 entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.

Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form when the following options are chosen.

Use this form to create a CELAS1 element and a PELAS property. This defines a scalar spring element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined to be grounded.


Create 0D Grounded Spring Point/1

Input Properties

Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1)


Spring Constant

[Damping Coefficient] Real Scalar

[Stress Coefficient]

Dof at Node 1

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the PELAS entry. This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines what damping is to be included. This is the GE field on the PELAS entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the stresses within the spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can either be a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the C1 field on the CELAS1 entry. This property is required.

OK

String


Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form when the following options are chosen.

Use this form to create a CDAMP1 element and a PDAMP property. This defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined to be grounded.


Create 0D Grounded Damper Point/1

Input Properties

Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)

Property Name Value Value TypeDefines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This property is the B field on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This property can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1 field on the CDAMP1 entry. This property is required.


Dof at Node 1 String

OK

Bush



Create 1D Bush Bar/2

Input PropertiesBush Joint


[Bush Orientation]

Real Scalar[Offset Location]

CID

Vector

Real Scalar[Spring Constant 1]

Real Scalar[Spring constant 2]

Vector

[Offset Orientation Sys]

[Offset Orientation Vec]

Field Definitions

OK

This toggle can also be set to Node Id or CID.


This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Bush Orientation System CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the grid point specified locates the system. If CID = 0, the basic coordinate system is used.

Spring Constant 1Spring Constant 2Spring Constant 3Spring Constant 4Spring Constant 5Spring Constant 6Stiff. Freq Depend 1Stiff. Freq Depend 2Stiff. Freq Depend 3Stiff. Freq Depend 4Stiff. Freq Depend 5Stiff. Freq Depend 6

Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.

Stiff. Force/Disp 1Stiff. Force/Disp 2Stiff. Force/Disp 3Stiff. Force/Disp 4Stiff. Force/Disp 5Stiff. Force/Disp 6

Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of freedom of the spring-damper system.

Damping Coefficient 1Damping Coefficient 2Damping Coefficient 3Damping Coefficient 4Damping Coefficient 5Damping Coefficient 6Damp. Freq Depend 1Damp. Freq Depend 2Damp. Freq Depend 3Damp. Freq Depend 4Damp. Freq Depend 5Damp. Freq Depend 6

Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency

Structural DampingStruc. Damp Freq Depend

Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.

Stress Recovery TranslationStress Recovery Rotation

Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element forces.

Strain Recovery TranslationStrain Recovery Rotation

Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element strains.



General Section Beam (CBAR)


Use this form to create a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO entry will be generated if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam element in the structural model.


Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2

Input PropertiesGeneral Section Beam (CBAR)


Mat Prop NameMaterial Name

Properties[Section Name] na:

Vector

Vector

Vector

String[Pinned DOFs @ Node 1]

Material Property Sets

Associate Beam Section

OK

[Offset @ Node 2]


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBAR entry. On the CBAR entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.

These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees of freedom at the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released. Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR record. These properties are optional.

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. The orientation vector can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane. This orientation defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.

Create Sections

Beam Library

Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputing dimensions.

If the Section Name Value Type is set to Properties, you can use this toggle to choose between defining the section properties manually (i.e., specifying the A, I11, I22, etc.) or by using the beam library to define the section. If the Section Name Value Type is set to Dimensions, this will be toggled ON automatically and will not be user selectable. The toggle does NOT affect the creation of a PBAR vs. PBARL or a PBEAM vs. PBEAML. The graphical display of the bar/beam section can be displayed/controlled using the Display/Load/BC/Elem Properties Menu.

Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MSC.Nastran’s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later.

[Offset @ Node 1]

Allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form.

Bar Orientation


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Inertia 1,1

Inertia 2,2

Inertia 2,1

Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, Y

Shear Stiff, Z

Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Y of Point C

Z of Point C

X of Point D

Y of Point D

X of Point E

Y of Point E

X of Point F

Y of Point F

Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Station Distances Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate format for the CBARAO entry is not supported. These values are real values. These properties are optional.

P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM)


Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This form defines a simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive, p-element analysis.


Create 1D Beam General SectionP-Formulation

Bar/2, Bar/3Bar/4


Input PropertiesP-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM)



[Section Name] na:

VectorBar Orientation

Vector[Offset @ Node 1]

Vector




OK

[Offset @ Node 2]


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.

These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and select degrees of freedom at the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released. It also defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR entry. These properties are optional.

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector, which can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node, is in the XY plane. This defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.

Create Sections

Beam Library

Allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form.

Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.

If the Section Name Value Type is set to Properties, you can use this toggle to choose between defining the section properties manually (i.e., specifying the A, I11, I22, etc.) or by using the beam library to define the section. If the Section Name Value Type is set to Dimensions, this will be toggled ON automatically and will not be user selectable. The toggle does NOT affect the creation of a PBAR vs. PBARL or a PBEAM vs. PBEAML. The graphical display of the bar/beam section can be displayed/controlled using the Display/Load/BC/Elem Properties Menu.

Properties

Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MSC.Nastran’s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Inertia 1,1

Inertia 2,2

Inertia 2,1

Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, Y

Shear Stiff, Z

Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Y of Point C

Z of Point C

X of Point D

Y of Point D

X of Point E

Y of Point E

X of Point F

Y of Point F

Indicates the stress recovery. Define the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam as defined in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Station Distances Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate format for the CBARAO records is not supported. These values are real values. These properties are optional.

Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders

Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.


P-order Coord. System The two sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.


Curved General Section Beam (CBEND)


Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam element of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define the radius of the bend and the orientation of that curvature.This element in MSC.Patran always uses the method of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). An alternate property of the Curved Pipe element also exists.

Action DimensionType Option(s) Topologies

Create 1D Beam Curved w/General Section Bar/2

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEND entry.This property is required.

Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. It is done by either specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a node. The CBEND element in MSC.Nastran has several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. This defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry. This property is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These properties define the settings of the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property is the A field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Curved General Sec. Beam (CBEND)


Material Name

Center of Curvature

[Radial Bar Offset]

[Axial Bar Offset]

Area

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

OK

Vector


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Inertia 1,1

Inertia 2,2

Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, R

Shear Stiff, Z

Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Radial NA Offset Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end nodes. Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the center of curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

R of Point C

Z of Point C

R of Point D

Z of Point D

R of Point E

Z of Point E

R of Point F

Z of Point F

These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined in the local element coordinate system. These properties are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND)


Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This defines a curved pipe or elbow element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as part of the element definition because, for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.


Create 1D Beam Curved W/Pipe Section Bar/2

Input Properties

Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND)


Material Name

Center of Curvature

[Radial Bar Offset]

[Axial Bar Offset]

Mean Pipe Radius

Pipe Thickness

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

OK

Vector

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. Defines the MID field on the PBEND entry. This property is required.

Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. This can be done either by specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a node. The CBEND element in MSC.Nastran has several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. Defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEND entry. This element in MSC.Patran always uses the method of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). This value is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipe cross section. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Indicates the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the t field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Indicates the distance from the centroid of the pipe cross section to mid-wall location. This is the r field on the PBEND entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Internal Pipe Pressure Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Stress Intensification Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This is a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the PBEND entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General, ASME, and Welding Council.

Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP)


Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBCOMP property. This defines a beam element of constant cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.


Create 1D Beam Lumped Section Bar/2

Input Properties

Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP)


Material Name

Bar Orientation

[Offset @ Node 1]

[Pinned DOFs @ Node 1]

[Pinned DOFs @ Node 2]

Mat Prop Name

Vector

OK

[Offset @ Node 2] Vector

Vector

String

String

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation defines the local XY plane, where the X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be defined either as a vector or as a reference to an existing node and defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.


Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and are optional.


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBCOMP property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Warp DOF @ Node 1

Warp DOF @ Node 2

Defines a node ID where the warping degree-of-freedom constraints and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within the model. They are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional.

Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, Y

Shear Stiff, Z

Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Y of NSM

Z of NSM

Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1 and M2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Symmetry Option Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the lumped areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string parameter. The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y Symmetry, Z Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting of the SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is optional.

Ys of Lumped Areas

Zs of Lumped Areas

Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined in the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the Yi and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values. These properties are optional.

Area Factors Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all be scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values for the Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values. These properties are optional.

Tapered Beam (CBEAM)


Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a beam element with varying cross sections.


Create 1D Beam Tapered Bar/2

Input PropertiesTapered Beam ( CBEAM )Property Name Value Value Type


Section Name[Section Name] na:



Vector



Use Beam Section

OK

[Offset @ Node 2]


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEAM entry. This property is required.


Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional.

Create Sections

Beam Library

This databox allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Use Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form.

Selecting this icon will activate the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.

If the Use Beam Section toggle is ON, a PBEAML entry is created. This entry is only supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be defined either as a vector or as a reference to an existing node. This orientation defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Warp DOF @ Node 1

Warp DOF @ Node 2

Defines a node ID where the warping degree of freedom constraints and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within the model. These are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional.

Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. These values are real values. These properties are optional.

Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Inertias 1,1

Inertias 2,2

Inertias 1,2

Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are real values. These properties are optional.

Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional.

Ys of C Points

Zs of C Points

Ys of D points

Zs of D Points

Ys of E Points

Zs of E Points

Ys of F Points

Zs of F Points

Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of real values, one for each station location. These properties are optional.

Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional.

NSM Inertia @ Node 1

NSM Inertia @ Node 2

Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NSM @ Node 1

Z of NSM @ Node 1

Y of NSM @ Node 2

Z of NSM @ Node 2

Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Shear Stiff, Y

Shear Stiff, Z

Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Shear Relief Y

Shear Relief Z

Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Warp Coeff. @ Node 1

Warp Coeff. @ Node 2

Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NA @ Node 1

Z of NA @ Node 1

Y of NA @ Node 2

Z of NA @ Node 2

Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross section coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.



General Section (CBEAM)


This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due to torsion. The capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the “Tapered Section” formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently.

Action Dimension Type Option(s)

Create 1D Beam General Section (CBEAM)

Input PropertiesGeneral Section( CBEAM )Property Name Value Value Type


[Section Name] na:



Vector




OK

[Offset @ Node 2]


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEAM entry. This property is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual shear centers of the beam cross section. These offsets are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.

Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional.

Create Sections

Beam Library

This databox allows a beam section previously created using the beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Use Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form.

Selecting this icon will activate the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.

If the Use Beam Section toggle is ON, a PBEAML entry is created. This entry is only supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69 or later.

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be defined either as a vector or as a reference to an existing node. This orientation defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.

Properties

Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MSC.Nastran SPOINTs to contain the warping degrees of freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the MSC.Patran database, and there is no way to recover any results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck translation, and provide the means to communicate to MSC.Nastran the continuity and constraint properties of the warping degrees of freedom in the model. These attributes of continuity and constraint are implied in the MSC.Patran database through the composition of the element properties application region and the set of options selected. These continuity and constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This connection of these attributes to the composition of the application region is new in MSC.Patran 2001r3, and represents a change in behavior from previous versions of MSC.Patran. The general rules of implied continuity are as follows.

1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous if a GRID ID at an end of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends of the other beam element. If a third beam element in the same application region also contains the same GRID ID, it is assumed that none of the beam elements is continuous at this location. This condition is known as a “multiple junction”. Similarly, if none of the other beam elements in the application region contain a matching GRID ID, the corresponding end of the beam element is taken to be not continuous. This condition is known as an “unmatched end”.

2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must have the matching GRID ID located at “End A” of one of the beam elements and at “End B” of the other. “End A” and “End B” positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs specified in the element connectivity array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of the element coordinate system points from “End A” to “End B”. If warping is not enabled, this restiction does not apply. If warping is enabled, any violation of this requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the finite element model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly oriented beam elements and initiate the translation again.

3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an application region will be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions, which will be generated at the time of analysis deck translation and will appear on the CBEAM cards for the appropriate end of both of the beam elements that are continuous at each location. If any end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, they will not be applied at locations of beam element continuity. This is new for MSC.Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of MSC.Patran, end release codes would be applied to all elements of the application region, regardless of continuity.

4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are not continuous. This applies to both “multiple junctions” and “unmatched ends”.

5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in the application region, whether “multiple junction” or “unmatched end”, with the applied end release codes dependent on what has been prescribed for “End A” and “End B” for the application region. If no end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, none are generated.

6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions), constraints applied to the SPOINTs are specified by the “warping option” specified in the element properties form. For example, if “A free B fixed” has been selected and the unmatched end is “End A” of its beam element, it will not be constrained. If it is “End B” of its element, it will be constrained. The warping SPOINT for a beam element


end involved in a multiple junction will not be constrained under any circumstances. If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element involved in a multiple junction, he will have to do so by splitting the application region in such a way that the beam element end becomes an “unmatched end” within its new application region.

7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the warping coefficient at either end of the beam element. When the user selects the “Beam Library” option, values for the warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus warping is implicitly enabled. If the user wishes to disable warping while using the Beam Library option, he must choose “None” as his “Warping Option” on the “Input Properties ...” form.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML element property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Warping Option This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping SPOINTs of unmatched ends within the application region (see continuity rules above). The choices available include “A free B free”, “A fixed B fixed”, “A free B fixed”, “A fixed B free”, or “None”. The choice of “None” is used to disable warping altogether for the current element property set, in which case no SPOINTs will be generated or constrained. Only unmatched ends within the application region will be eligible for constraining, and whether or not a constraint is applied will depend on the option selected, and whether the unmatched end is “End A” or “End B” of its beam element. If no selection is made for this element property, “A free B free” is selected by default.

Warp Coeff. @ Node 1Warp Coeff. @ Node 2

Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. This field consists of a set of real values separated by legal delimiters, such as white space and/or commas. If this list is entered, then the properties that follow may also be in the form of lists consisting of the same number of values. If they are in the form of a single real value, then that value will apply to all stations of the beam element. This property is optional. If it is not provided, then all other specified section properties apply to the entire beam, and lists of values will not be accepted.

Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross sectional area of the element. This property defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a real value, a list (if a list of stations has been provided), or a reference to an existing field definition, in which case a single real value will be evaluated for each element of the application region. This property is required.

Inertias 1,1Inertias 2,2Inertias 1,2

Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These values define the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed.

Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J fields on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed.

Ys of C PointsZs of C PointsYs of D PointsZs of D PointsYs of E PointsZs of E PointsYs of F PointsZs of F Points

Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the shear center, for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam, or lists of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed.

Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed.

NSM Inertia @ Node 1NSM Inertia @ Node 2

Specifies the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NSM @ Node 1Z of NSM @ Node 1Y of NSM @ Node 2Z of NSM @ Node 2

Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Shear Stiff, YShear Stiff, Z

Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.


Shear Relief YShear Relief Z

Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NA @ Node 1Z of NA @ Node 1Y of NA @ Node 2Z of NA @ Node 2

Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

General Section Rod (CROD)


Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tension-compression-torsion element of the structural model.


Create 1D Rod General SectionStandard

Bar/2

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PROD entry. This property is required.

Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This is the C field on the PROD entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

General Section Rod (CROD)


Material Name

Area Real Scalar

[Torsional Constant]

[Tors. Stress Coeff.]

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

OK

Real Scalar

[Nonstructural Mass] Real Scalar

Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.


General Section Rod (CONROD)


Use this form to create a CONROD element. This defines a tension-compression-torsion element of the structural model.


Create 1D Rod General SectionCONROD

Bar/2

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CONROD entry. This property is required.

Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property is the A field on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This property is the C field on the CONROD entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

General Section Rod (CONROD)


Material Name

Area Real Scalar

[Torsional Constant]

[Tors. Stress Coeff.]

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

OK

Real Scalar


Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This property is the J field on the CONROD entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE)


Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a tension-compression-torsion element with a thin-walled tube cross section.


Create 1D Rod Pipe Section Bar/2

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PTUBE entry. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property is required.

Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the OD and OD2 fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at Node 2 Property is optional.

Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PRTUBE entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE)


Material Name

Outer Diameter @ Node Real Scalar

[Outer Diam. @ Node 2]

Pipe Thickness

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

OK

Real Scalar



Scalar Spring (CELAS1)


Use this form to create a CELAS1 element and a PELAS property. This defines a scalar spring of the structural model.


Create 1D Spring Bar/2

Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This property is the K field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines what damping is to be included. This property is the GE field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to at each node. The degree of freedom can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These properties define the settings of the C1 and C2 fields on the CELAS1 entry. These properties are required.

Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the stresses within the spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Scalar Spring (CELAS1)


Spring Constant


[Stress Coefficient]

Dof at Node 1

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

OK

String


Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)


Use this form to create a CDAMP1 element and a PDAMP property. This defines a scalar damper element of the structural model.


Create 1D Damper Scalar Bar/2

Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This is the B field on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each node. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These define the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CDAMP1 entry. These properties are required.

Input Properties

Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)


[Damping Coefficient]

Dof at Node 1

Real Scalar

OK

String



Viscous Damper (CVISC)


Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a viscous damper element of the structural model.


Create 1D Damper Viscous Bar/2

This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Viscous Damper (CVISC)


[Ext. Viscous Coeff.]

[Rot. Viscous Coeff.]

Real Scalar

OK

Real Scalar

Gap (CGAP)


Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap or frictional element of the structural model for non-linear analysis.


Create 1D Gap AdaptiveNonadaptive

Bar/2

Defines the local element coordinate system for this element that can be defined in one of three ways. If the two end nodes of the gap are not coincident, then the Gap Orientation can reference a vector or a node ID. This local x-axis would then run between the two end nodes and the orientation information would define the local xy plane. However, if the two end nodes are coincident, then the Gap Orientation refers to an existing coordinate system definition and will be used as the local element coordinate system. This Gap Orientation defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, G0, and CID fields on the CGAP entry. This property is required.

Defines the initial opening of the gap element. The nodal coordinates are only used to define the closure direction. This property is the U0 field on the PGAP entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed. The closed stiffness should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the surrounding elements. The open stiffness should be approximately 10 orders of magnitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields on the PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field definitions. The closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness property is optional.

Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this can be used for initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting this value to the initial opening stiffness will improve the solution convergence. This is the F0 field on the PGAP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Gap (CGAP)


Gap Orientation

[Initial Opening]

[Preload]

[Opened Stiffness]

[Sliding Stiffness]

Real Scalar

OK

Closed Stiffness Real Scalar

Vector

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CGAP element and a PGAP property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Sliding Stiffness Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element is closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Static Friction Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Kinematic Friction Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2 field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Max Penetration Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the TMAX field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Max Adjust Ratio Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is the MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Penet. Lower Bound Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the TRMIN field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Friction Coeff. y

Friction Coeff. Z

Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this element in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2 fields on the PGAP entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Scalar Mass (CMASS1)


Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of the structural model.


Create 1D 1D Mass Bar/2

Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This property is the M field on the PMASS entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each node. These can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CMASS1 entry. These properties are required.

Input Properties

Scalar Mass (CMASS1)


Mass

Dof at Node 1

Real Scalar

OK

String



PLOTEL


Use this form to create a PLOTEL element.


Create 1D PLOTEL Bar/2

Dummy property data not required to define the PLOTEL property set.

Input Properties

PLOTEL element


OK

[Dummy Property Data] String

Scalar Bush



Create 1D Scalar Bush Bar/2

Input PropertiesScalar Bush Joint


[Bush Orientation]

Real Scalar[Offset Location]

CID

Vector

Real Scalar[Spring Constant 1]

Real Scalar[Spring constant 2]

Vector

[Offset Orientation Sys]

[Offset Orientation Vec]

Field Definitions

OK

This toggle can also be set to Node Id or CID.


This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Bush Orientation Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If CID is blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins the elements grid points (GA, GB Element Properties/Application Region). The X-Y plane is determined by specifying the Bush Orientation. If a vector input is given, these components define an orientation vector from the first grid point (GA) of the element in the displacement coordinate system at that point (GA). If the Bush Orientation references a grid point ID (Value), this orientation point forms an orientation vector which extends from the first element grid point to the orientation point.

If a CID ≥ 0 is specified for Bush Orientation System, the element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the first elemental grid point (GA) is used to locate the system. If CID = 0, the elemental coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate System.

If no orientation is specified in any form, the element x-axis is along the line which connects the element’s grid points. The material property inputs for this condition must be limited to simple axial and torsional stiffness and damping (k1,k4,B1,B4).

Offset Location Offset Location (0.0 ≤ s ≤ 1.0) specifies the spring-damper location along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting the fraction of the distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the spring-damper.

Offset Orientation System Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the spring-damper offset when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB.

Offset Orientation Vector Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative to the offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system is -1 or blank, the offset orientation vector is ignored.

v

Spring Constant 1Spring Constant 2Spring Constant 3Spring Constant 4Spring Constant 5Spring Constant 6Stiff. Freq Depend 1Stiff. Freq Depend 2Stiff. Freq Depend 3Stiff. Freq Depend 4Stiff. Freq Depend 5Stiff. Freq Depend 6

Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.

Stiff. Force/Disp 1Stiff. Force/Disp 2Stiff. Force/Disp 3Stiff. Force/Disp 4Stiff. Force/Disp 5Stiff. Force/Disp 6

Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of freedom of the spring-damper system.

Damping Coefficient 1Damping Coefficient 2Damping Coefficient 3Damping Coefficient 4Damping Coefficient 5Damping Coefficient 6Damp. Freq Depend 1Damp. Freq Depend 2Damp. Freq Depend 3Damp. Freq Depend 4Damp. Freq Depend 5Damp. Freq Depend 6

Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency

Structural DampingStruc. Damp Freq Depend

Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.

Stress Recovery TranslationStress Recovery Rotation

Stress Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element forces.

Strain Recovery TranslationStrain Recovery Rotation

Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element strains.



Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)


Use this form to create a CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.


Create 2D Shell HomogeneousStandard Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4Tri/6, Quad/8

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select one from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines the thickness, which will be uniform over each element. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Stan. Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)


Material Name

[Material Orientation]

Thickness

[Plate Offset]

[Fiber Dist. 1]

OK


CID

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUADi and a CTRIAi element and a PSHELL property, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4/8 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1

Fiber Dist. 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the bottom and top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.


Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR)


Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.


Create 2D Shell HomogeneousRevised Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can be either a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Input Properties

Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR)


Material Name


Thickness

[Fiber Dist.1]

[Fiber Dist. 2]

OK


CID

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis.

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.


Create 2D Shell HomogeneousP-Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4,Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16


Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can be either a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Input Properties

P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)


Material Name


Thickness

[Fiber Dist.1]

OK


CID

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

[Material Orient. Angle Real Scalar

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of the basic system.This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.


This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1

Fiber Dist. 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Starting P-orders and

Maximum P-orders

Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.


Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP)


Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PCOMP property.


Create 2D Shell LaminateStandard Formulation


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type the name in. The specified material must be a laminate material in MSC.Patran. The data in this material definition defines the settings of the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the offset of the element‘s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Stan. Lam. Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP)


Material Name


[Plate Offset]

OK


CID

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name


Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP)


Use this form to create a CQUADR or CTRIAR element and a PCOMP property.


Create 2D Shell LaminateRevised Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. The specified material must be a laminate material in MSC.Patran. The data in this material definition defines the settings of the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is defined in mass per unit area, of the element. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Rev. Lam. Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP)


Material Name


OK


CID

Mat Prop Name

Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)


Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.


Create 2D Shell Equivalent SectionStandard Formulation


Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.

Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Input Properties

Stan. Equiv. Sec. Plate (CQUAD4)


[Membrane Material]

[Bending Material]

[Shear Material]


Thickness

OK

[Coupling Material] Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

CID

Mat Prop Name

Mat Prop Name

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Distance 1

Fiber Distance 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR)


Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.


Create 2D Shell Equivalent SectionRevised Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Rev. Equiv. Sect. Plate (CQUADR)


[Membrane Material]

[Bending Material]


Thickness

OK

[Shear Material] Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

CID

Mat Prop Name

[Bending Stiffness] Real Scalar


This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Distance 1

Fiber Distance 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)


Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.


Create 2D Shell Equivalent SectionP-Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR3 or CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system.This property is optional.

Input Properties

P-Formulation Equiv. Sect. Plate (CQUAD4)


[Membrane Material]

[Bending Material]


Thickness

OK

[Shear Material] Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

CID

Mat Prop Name



This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.


Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3entry and can be either real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1

Fiber Dist. 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders

Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields in the PVAL entry.


Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.


Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.



Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4)




Create 2D Bending Panel Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4Tri/6, Quad/8

Input Properties

Stan. Bending Panel (CQUAD4)


Material Name

[Nonstructural Mass]

Thickness

OK

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

[Material Orientation] CID


Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4 or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.


Fiber Dist. 1

Fiber Dist. 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.


Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR)




Create 2D Bending Panel Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4



Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definitions. This property is required.

Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can either be real values or a reference to and existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Rev. Bending Panel (CQUADR)

Property Name Value

Material Name


Thickness

OK

[Fiber Dist. 1] Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

[Fiber Dist. 2] Real Scalar


Value Type

P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4)


Use this form to create a CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.


Create 2D Bending Panel P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16

Input Properties

P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4)


Material Name

Thickness

OK

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name



Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system.This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and this value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.



This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.



Fiber Dist. 1

Fiber Dist. 2

Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Starting P-orders and

Maximum P-orders


P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.




Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6)


Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element. This defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes.


Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Tri/3, Tri/6

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)


OK


Material Name Mat Prop Name


Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)




Create 2D 2D Solid Plane StrainStandard Formulation


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.

Input Properties

Stn. Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)


OK


Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR)




Create 2D 2D Solid Plane StrainRevised Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.

Input Properties

Rev. Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR)


OK



P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)


Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.


Create 2D 2D Solid Plane StrainP- Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16

Input Properties

P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)



OK

[Starting P-orders] Vector

Vector[Maximum P-orders]

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior.


Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.



Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:







Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.


Standard Membrane (CQUAD4)




Create 2D Membrane Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4Tri /6, Quad/8

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1)reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element. (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This value can either be a real value or reference an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Stan. Membrane (CQUAD4)


Material Name


Thickness

OK

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar


Revised Membrane (CQUADR)




Create 2D Membrane Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Input Properties

Rev. Membrane (CQUADR)


Material Name


Thickness

OK

Real Scalar

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.


Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.


P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4)


Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.


Create 2D Membrane P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9. Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16

Input Properties

P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4)



OK


Vector[Maximum P-orders]

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.


Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.





P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.





Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.


Shear Panel (CSHEAR)


Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR property. This defines a shear panel element of the structural model.


Create 2D Shear Panel Quad/4

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required.

Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.

Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 2-3 and 1-4 sides. This is the F2 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 1-2 and 3-4 sides. This is the F1 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Shear Panel (CSHEAR)


Material Name

Thickness


[Extensional Stiff. 14]

Mat Prop Name

Real Scalar

OK

[Extensional Stiff. 12] Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Real Scalar

Solid (CHEXA)


Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.


Create 3D Solid Standard Tet/4, Wedge/6Hex/8, Tet/10Wedge/15, Hex/20

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID field on the PSOLID entry. This property is required.

Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is optional.

Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional.

Defines the integration scheme to be used. This property is the ISOP field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or Full. This property is optional.

Input Properties

Solid (CHEXA)


Material Name

[Mater. Orientation]

Mat Prop Name

OK

String

[Integration Network] String

[Integration Scheme] String

[Output Locations] String

Defines both the orientation of referenced nonisotropic materials and solid element results. This can be set to Global, Elemental, or to a specific coordinate frame reference and defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. Nonlinear stresses and strains are output in the Elemental system regardless of the setting.


P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an adaptive, p-element analysis:

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.


Create 3D Solid P-Formulation Tet/4, Wedge/6Hex/8, Tet/10Wedge/15, Hex/20, Tet/16, Tet/40, Wedge/24,Wedge/52, Hex/32, Hex/64

Input Properties

P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA)


Material Name

[Mater. Orientation]

Mat Prop Name

OK

String


[Minimum P-orders] Vector

[Maximum P-orders] Vector

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PSOLID entry. This property is required.

Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coord. System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

Defines orientation for the referenced material. This property can be set to Global, Elemental or to a user-defined coordinate system and defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. This property is optional.






Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Integration Network Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is optional.

Integration Scheme Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This can be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional.


Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear analysis:

Use this form to create a CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element and a PLPLANE property.


Create 2D 2D Solid Plane StrainHyperelastic Formulation

Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Quad/9

Input Properties

Hyp. Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)


Material Name

[Plane of Deformation]]

Mat Prop Name

OK

CID

[Output Locations]] String

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required.

Location of stress and strain output. the options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.” this defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry.

Identification number of a coordinate system defining the plane of deformation. This defines the CID field on the PLPLANE entry.


Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)


Use this form to create a CQUADX or CTRIAX element and a PLPLANE property.


Create 2D 2D Solid AxisymmetricHyperelastic Formulation

CQUADX,CTRIAX

Input Properties

Hype. Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)



OK


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required.

Location of stress and strain output. the options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.” this defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry.



Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA)


Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PLSOLID property.


Create 3D Solid Hyperelastic Formulation

HEX, PENT, TET

Input Properties

Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA)



OK


Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PLSOLID entry. This property is required.

Location of stress and strain output. the options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.” this defines the STR field on the PLSOLID entry.


2.8 Beam ModelingModeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shell, plate, or solid structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that may be complex functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary to define the orientation of this cross section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset from the two finite element nodes defining the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly defined. Fortunately, MSC.Patran provides a number of tools to simplify these aspects of modeling.

Cross Section DefinitionThe cross section properties are defined on the element property forms shown on pages General Section Beam (CBAR) (p. 77) and Tapered Beam (CBEAM) (p. 90). The properties can be entered directly into the data boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional Constant, etc. or by pushing the large I-beam icon on these forms to access the Beam Library form. The Beam Library forms are a much more convenient way of defining properties for standard cross sections and are shown below.


Create Action. The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the particular cross section desired (e.g. I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components of the beam section must be entered.

Beam Library

Action: Create

Type: Standard Shape

Existing Sections

* Filter

New Section Name

H

W1

W2

t

t1

t2

Calculate /Display Write to Report File

OK Apply Reset Cancel

10.

7.

4.

1.1

0.70.5

Hexagonal

Solid-Rod

I-Beam

I-Beam

Enter the dimensions of the beam section here, referring to the beam section icon.

Current beam section as selected from the section library icon palette. The required dimensions are shown.

Beam section library icon palette. Select the icon representing the desired section.

These forward and backward arrows provide access to additional beam section icons.

Beam section name to be created.

Writes the current beam properties to a report file.

Calculates the beam properties based on the current dimensions and displays an image of the scaled section along with the properties.

List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the section names of interest using the filter mechanism.

Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other options available with the beam library are documented in the MSC.Patran User’s Guide Tools>Beam Library (p. 370) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Once one or more beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the section data box on the element properties form.

Supplied Functions.

I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness (t2),lower flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and web thickness (t)-- allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition.

Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).

Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).

Solid-Rod - Solid section, one dimension -- radius (R).

Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2).

Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2).

Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).

Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W).

Box-Unsymmetrical - Closed section, six dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side flange thickness (t3), left side flange thickness (t4).

Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of hat flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t).

H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of vertical flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one vertical flange (W1/2).


Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t), horizontal flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2).

Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange between as measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one side (W), thickness (t1).

Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the common edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior diagonal angle).

Cross Section OrientationThe Bar Orientation data box on the Input Properties form is used to define how the y-axis of the beam cross section is oriented in space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This tells MSC ⁄Nastran that the cross section y-axis lies in the plane defined by the beam’s x-axis (the line connecting the two node points) and this vector. The Value Type pop up menu may be changed to Node ID. In this case the y-axis lies in the plane defined by the x-axis and the selected node.

When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is selected the following select box appears on the screen.

After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correctness in MSC.Patran. The first option is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show Action, the Definition of X Y Plane property, and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors defining the orientation will be shown on the model. A second option can be used when the Beam Library has been used to define the beam cross section. There is an option on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 293) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions called Beam Display. The menu allows different display options for displaying an outline of the defined cross section on the model in the correct location and orientation.

Users should be aware of one difference between the MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran definitions for cross section orientation. In MSC.Patran the orientation is completely independent of the analysis coordinate system at the beam nodes. In MSC.Nastran, the orientation vector is assumed to be defined in the same system as the analysis system at the first node of the beam. In MSC.Patran it is perfectly permissible to define the orientation in a different coordinate system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN input file is generated, the necessary transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 will be performed.

These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are discussed in more detail in the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

These three tools define the orientation vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a selected coordinate system. This is a convenient way to specify the orientation when it is aligned with one of the three axes of a rectangular coordinate system. When the system is not rectangular (e.g. cylindrical) these tools may not provide the desired definition because the defined vector does not change direction at different points in space--these tools just provide an alternate way to define a global vector.

This tool may be used to define a general vector with respect to an alternate coordinate system. When this icon is picked, the select menu changes to the one on the right.

These tools provide different ways to define vectors. In addition, the user is requested to select a coordinate system in which this vector is defined.

The simplest list processor syntax that appears in the databox for a vector in an alternate coordinate system is <x_component, y_component, z_component> coord cord_id (e.g. <1, 0, 0> coord 3). In many cases it is easy to simply type a definition in this form into the Bar Orientation databox.


Cross Section End OffsetsTwo data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally define an offset from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or from node 2 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for defining these vectors. One difference between the orientation definition and the offset definitions, however, is that for the offset the magnitude of the vector is important. Because of this, the select menu tools are usually not very convenient. Typically, offsets are defined by typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>) into the appropriate data box.

Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these options are very similar to those for orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be displayed as vectors on the model. This option is not especially useful because the vector plot shows only the direction of the offset, not the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more useful to view the Beam Display menu on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 293) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions to select the display option with offsets. The viewport will then show the beam displayed in both the offset and non-offset positions.

Stiffened Cylinder ExampleFigure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffeners. The cross section was defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input Properties form. The Z cross section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section dimensions input, a section name input, and the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties form, the Use Beam Section toggle is set to ON. The defined section name is selected in the [Section Name] data box. The string <-1.0 0. 0.> coord 1 is typed into the Bar Orientation data box to align the cross section orientation with the radial direction of the global, cylindrical system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 typed into the Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end offsets to be radially inward.

Figure 2-1 Stiffened Cylinder

1 R

T

Z

X

Y

Z


2.9 Loads and Boundary ConditionsThe Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are several option menus. The selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will determine which load and boundary conditions form appears, and ultimately, which MSC.Nastran loads and boundary conditions will be created.

The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and details of all the loads and boundary conditions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Analysts Preference.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

Loads & Boundary Conditions FormThis form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Boundary Conditions form is used to provide options to create the various MSC.Nastran loads and boundary conditions. For a definition of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Options for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary Conditions form. For more information see Defining Contact Regions (p. 168).

Load/Boundary Conditions

Action: Create

Analysis Type: Structural

Type: Nodal

Target Element Type: 2D

Object: Displacement

Current Load Case:

Default...

Type: Static

Existing Sets

New Set Name

Select Application Region...

-Apply-

Input Data...

Defines the general load type to be applied. Object choices are Displacement, Force, Pressure, Temperature, Inertial Load, Initial Displacement, Initial Velocity, Velocity, Acceleration, Distributed Load, CID Distributed Load, Total Load, Contact, and Initial Temperature.

Defines what type of region is to be loaded. The available options depend on the selected Object. The general selections can be Nodal, Element Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal is applied explicitly to nodes. Element Uniform defines a constant value to be applied over an entire element, element face, or element edge. Element Variable defines a value that varies across an entire element, element face, or element edge.

Defines the target element type to which this load will be applied. This only appears if the type is Element Uniform or Element Variable. This can be 0D, 1D, 2D, or 3D.

Generates either a Static (p. 156) or Time Dependent (p. 157) Input Data form, depending on the current Load Case Type.

Current Load Case type is set on the Load Case menu. When the Load Cases toggle located on the main menu is chosen, the Load Cases menu will appear. Under Load Case Type, select either Static or Time Dependent, then enter the name of the case, and click on the Apply button.


The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected action.

Object Type

❏ Displacement ❏ Nodal

❏ Element Uniform

❏ Element Variable

❏ Force ❏ Nodal

❏ Pressure ❏ Element Uniform


❏ Temperature ❏ Nodal

❏ Element Uniform


❏ Inertial Load ❏ Element Uniform

❏ Initial Displacement ❏ Nodal

❏ Initial Velocity ❏ Nodal

❏ Velocity ❏ Nodal

❏ Acceleration ❏ Nodal

❏ Distributed Load ❏ Element Uniform


❏ CID Distributed Load ❏ Element Uniform


❏ Total Load ❏ Element Uniform

❏ Contact ❏ Element Uniform

❏ Initial Temperature ❏ Nodal

Static

This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form (p. 154). The information on the Input Data form will vary depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form.

Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form. The default value is 1.0. Primarily used when field definitions are used to define the load values.

Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables (p. 158) for detailed information.

When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.

Defines the coordinate frame used to interpret the degree-of-freedom data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.

Input Data

1

Load/BC Set Scale Factor

Spatial Fields

Coord 0


OK Reset

Translations (T1, T2, T3)

Rotations (R1, R2, R3)

This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.

FEM Dependent Data...


Time Dependent

This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary Condition form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form (p. 154) and Load Cases (p. 167). The information on the Input Data form will vary, depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form.

Input Data

1

Load/BC Set Scale Factor

Spatial Dependence * Time Dependence

Spatial Fields Time Dependent Fields

Coord 0


OK Reset

Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3)

Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3)

Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3)

Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form.The default value is 1.0. Primarily used when field definitions are used to define the load values.

When specifying time dependent values in the Input Data entries, time-dependent fields can be referenced. All defined time-dependent fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a time-dependent field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.

Defines the coordinate frame to be used to interpret the degree-of-freedom data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.

Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables (p. 158) for detailed information.

When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.

FEM Dependent Data...

This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.

Object Tables

These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are defined. The data fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cases, the data fields also depend on the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables outline and define the various input data that pertains to a specific selected object:

Displacement

Creates MSC.Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data entries. All non blank entries will cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation.

Applies a zero or nonzero displacement boundary condition to the face of solid elements. The primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; but it may also be used for standard solid elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are created. If applied to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and SPCD entries are created.

Object Type Analysis Type

Displacement Nodal Structural

Input Data Description

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These are in model length units.

Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the enforced rotational displacement values. These are in radians.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension

Displacement Element UniformElement Variable

Structural 3D


Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These values are in model-length units.


Force

Creates MSC.Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries.

Pressure

Creates MSC.Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.


Force Nodal Structural


Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom. This defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry.

Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freedom. This defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry.


Pressure Element Uniform Structural 2D


Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face.

Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face.

Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (i.e. independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated at the middle of the application region.

Creates MSC.Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Creates MSC.Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.


Pressure Element Uniform Structural 3D


Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated once at the center of the applied region.


Pressure Element Variable Structural 2D


Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.

Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.

Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated independently at each node.


Creates MSC.Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Temperature

Creates MSC.Nastran TEMP Bulk Data entries.

Creates MSC.Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.


Pressure Element Variable Structural 3D


Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.


Temperature Nodal Structural


Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.


Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D


Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b, T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0.

Creates MSC.Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

Creates MSC.Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.


Temperature Element Uniform Structural 2D


Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness is defined to be 0.0.


Temperature Element Variable Structural 1D


Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA and TB fields.

Axis-1 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields.

Axis-2 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.


Temperature Element Variable Structural 2D


Creates MSC.Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are created for the constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the case when a spatial field is referenced.

Inertial Load

Creates MSC.Nastran GRAV and RFORCE Bulk Data entries.


Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.

Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.


Temperature Element Uniform Element Variable

Structural 1D, 2D, 3D


Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.


Inertial Load Element Uniform Structural


Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry.

Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3)

Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.

Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.

The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity and rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In generating the GRAV and RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each MSC.Patran load set.

Initial Displacement

Creates a set of MSC.Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Initial Velocity

Creates a set of MSC.Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.


Initial Displacement Nodal Structural


Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.


Initial Velocity Nodal Structural


Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.


Distributed Load

Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MSC.Nastran PLOAD1 entries. The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis and the Bar Orientation element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Load can be created. If the Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated manually if necessary.

For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a linear load variation.

Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The coordinate system for the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See The MSC.Patran Element Library (p. 259) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling. For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and always points into the element. The MSC.Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.


Distributed Load Element Uniform Element Variable

Structural 1D


Edge Distributed Load (f1,f2,f3)

Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.

Edge Distributed Moment (m1,m2,m3)

Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.


Distributed Load Element Uniform Element Variable

Structural 2D

For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nodes lying on the edge.


Edge Distributed Load (f1,f2,f3)

For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries).

Edge Distributed Moment (m1,m2,m3)

For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments (MOMENT entries).


2.10 Load CasesLoad cases in MSC.Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load environment for the model. Load cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within MSC.Nastran is similar. The individual load sets are translated into MSC.Nastran load sets, and the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE commands in the Case Control Section.

For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, see Load Cases Application (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

2.11 Defining Contact RegionsThe MSC.Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in MSC.Nastran Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D structural regions or rigid bodies.

This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in MSC.Patran. After selecting the Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that may come into contact. Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form.

Application Region

Geometry Filter

Geometry

Master Surface: Slide Line

Slave Surface: Slide Line

Active Region: Master

Select Curves

Add Remove

Master Region

Slave Region

OK Clear

One or more curves, surface edges, or solid edges are defined for the Master and Slave application regions. The application region can only contain geometric entities. To model contact between FEM entities without associated geometry, curves must first be created from the nodes using the tools available in the Geometry application.

Toggles the select box between Master and Slave regions. The Master and Slave application regions can be defined in either order.

Select the curve or edge.

Adds the entities in the Select Curves databox to either the Master Region or Slave Region depending on the setting of the Active Region option menu.

◆


ContactThe second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. This is done by pushing the Input Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following subordinate form.

Input Data

Penetration Type: One Sided

Friction Coefficient (MU1)

Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF)

Penalty Stiffness Scaling Factor (SFAC)

1.0

Slideline Width (W1)

A Vector Pointing from Master to Slave Surface

OK Reset

A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from the Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used to define the coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each region.

If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not allowed to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Two Sided, in addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments of the Slave Region. This is the PTYPE field on the BCONP entry.

Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces. This is the MU1 field on the BFRIC entry.

FSTIF on the BFRIC entry and SFAC on the BCONP entry are penalty parameters in the contact formulation. The default values are usually adequate.

Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry.


CHAPTER

3 Running an Analysis

■ Review of the Analysis Form

■ Translation Parameters

■ Solution Types

■ Direct Text Input

■ Solution Parameters

■ Subcases

■ Subcase Parameters

■ Output Requests

■ Select Superelements

■ Select Explicit MPCs...

■ Subcase Select

■ Restart Parameters

■ Optimize

■ Interactive Analysis

3.1 Review of the Analysis FormThe Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran mainform, is chosen. To run an analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on the Analysis form. Other forms brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation parameters, solution type, solution parameters, output requests, and the load cases. These forms are described on the following pages. For further information see The Analysis Form (p. 8) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

1CHAPTER 3Running an Analysis

Analysis FormThis form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis run, select Analyze as the Action.

Analysis

AnalyzeAction:

Code:

Entire ModelObject:

Analysis DeckMethod:

Job Name

Translation Parameters...

Solution Type...

List of already existing jobs. If one of these jobs is selected, the name will appear in the Job Name list box and all parameters for this job will be retrieved from the database. An existing job can be submitted again by simply selecting it and pushing Apply. It is often convenient to select an existing job, modify a few parameters and push Apply to submit the new job.

Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name for all resulting MSC.Nastran files and message files.

Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.Available Jobs

Apply

MSC.Nastran:

Type: Structural

my_job

Job Description

MSC.Nastran job created on01-Feb-93 at 14:32:43

Actions can be set to:

AnalyzeOptimizeRead Output2Read Input FileAttach XDBDeleteMonitor (if MSC.Patran Analysis Manager iis installed).Abort (if MSC.Patran Analysis Manager iis installed).

This text is used to generate the TITLE card in the MSC.Nastran executive control section.

Subcase Select...

Subcases...

Open MSC.Patran Analysis Manager form.

Direct Text Input...

a

Analysis Manager...

Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows the user to directly enter data for the BULK DATA, Case Control, Executive Control and File Management sections of the NASTRAN input file.

The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action.

The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four choices: Entire Model, Current Group, Existing Deck, and Restart.

• Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed.

• Current Group is the selected Object if only part of the model is to be analyzed. Create a group of that part, confirm it is the current group, then select Current Group as the Object. For more information see The Group Menu (p. 213) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

• Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to MSC.Nastran. The jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the suffix “.bdf” to form the input filename. This file must reside in the current directory.

• Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) solution types. The Restart Parameters (p. 251) form allows you to specify where to resume the analysis.

• The Type indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The types are listed below:

• Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file is submitted to MSC.Nastran for complete analysis.

• Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file is submitted to MSC.Nastran for a check run only.

• Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus all load case, analysis type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file, ready for MSC.Nastran should be generated.

• Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains only the model data including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material property, and loads and boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point.

Object Type

Entire Model Full RunCheck RunAnalysis DeckModel Only

Current Group Full RunCheck RunAnalysis DeckModel Only

Existing Deck Full Run

Restart Full RunCheck RunAnalysis Deck


Overview of Analysis Job Definition and SubmittalTo submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MSC.Nastran it is necessary only to click the Apply button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will be made automatically. Other solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more lower-level forms. Several different analysis examples are considered below.

To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase Select form. Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with appropriate defaults can be selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more parameters for a subcase is desired (e.g., to change an output request), the Subcases... form must be accessed. Then it is simple to select a subcase and bring up the appropriate form (e.g., Output Requests) to make changes.

For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form and make the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be accessed from the Solution Type form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just as for the linear static case, subcases are automatically created for each defined load case. These can be selected on the Subcase Select form or modified on the Subcases form.

In the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a MSC.Patran load case with some additional parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This association is further strengthened since the default subcases are created for each load case and have the same name as their associated load case. In the rest of this document, the terms load case and subcase will generally be used interchangeably. When a specific form is referenced, Load case and Subcase will be capitalized.

3.2 Translation ParametersThis subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected.

Translation Parameters

Data Output

Data Output: XDB and Print

OUTPUT2 Requests: P3 Built In

OUTPUT2 Format: Binary

Tolerances

Division: 1.0e-08

Numerical: 1.0e-04

Writing: 1.0e-21

Bulk Data Format

Card Format: either

Minimum Signif. Digits: 4

Node Coordinates: reference frame

MSC.Nastran Version: 70.7

Number of Tasks:

Write Properties on Element Entries

Do not Write Continuation Markers

Use Iterative Solver

Numbering Options...

Bulk Data Include File...

OK Defaults Cancel

Defines various tolerances used during translation.

1. Division prevents divide-by-zero errors.2. Numerical determines if two real values are equal.3. Writing determines if a value is approximately zero

when generating a Bulk Data entry field.

Defines type of data output. “Print” specifies output of data to the MSC.Nastran print file (*.f06). “OP2” specifies output of data to a MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file (*.op2). “XDB” specifies output of data to a MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This is will place a PARAM, POST, -1 or PARAM, POST, 0 in the input deck for OP2 or XDB respectively. The default value can be changed in the settings.pcl file.

Specifies type of OUTPUT2 commands.

“Alter File” specifies the use of an external alter file found on the MSC.Patran file path and following the “msc_v#_sol#.alt” naming convention. See Files (p. 338) for more details. .

“P2 Built In” specifies use of MSC.Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared toward PATRAN 2.

“P3 Built In” option is appropriate only for Database Runs, see Solution Parameters (p. 183). If Database Run has been deselected, this option will be set internally to “Alter File”.

Specifies format of the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 (*.op2) files. Use “Text” format when the resulting OUTPUT2 file must be transported between heterogeneous computer platforms.

Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis. It is assumed that the environment is configured for distributed parallel processing. For a system with multiple processors, the number of tasks must be less than or equal to the number of processors. If the number of tasks is greater than the number of processors on the system, an error is issued. The multiple systems processing is only available for IBM if the host list is provided in the working directory. The hosts can have single or multiple processors. The analysis uses one processor per machine if it can, otherwise it uses multiple processors of the systems in rotation.

Grid Precision Digits: 6

Specifies where to round off a grid point coordinate before it’s written out to the bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will be written out as 1.34.




Data Output

Data Output: XDB and Print

OUTPUT2 Requests: P3 Built In

OUTPUT2 Format: Binary

Tolerances

Division: 1.0e-08

Numerical: 1.0e-04

Writing: 1.0e-21

Bulk Data Format

Card Format: either

Minimum Signif. Digits: 4

Node Coordinates: reference frame

MSC.Nastran Version: 70.5

Number of Tasks:

Write Properties on Element Entries

Do not Write Continuation Markers

Use Iterative Solver

Numbering Options...

Bulk Data Include File...

OK Defaults Cancel

Defines the type of fields to be used in the Bulk Data entry. Entry format can be set to small, large, or either. If either is selected, the Minimum Significant Digits value is used to determine if the values on a particular Bulk Data entry can be placed in small fields, or if large fields are required. The small-field format consists of Bulk Data entry fields 8 columns wide, while the large field format is 16 columns wide.

Invokes the subordinate form, Numbering Options (p. 178), which defines automatic numbering offsets and possible syntaxes for encoded IDs.

Invokes the subordinate form, Select File (p. 179), which allows a file to be selected for inclusion in the Bulk Data Section of the NASTRAN input file.

Specifies the version of MSC.Nastran. The version specified here is used for two purposes: to create the full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only whole numbers and letters; for example, 66a, 67 and 68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version number can be overridden by setting the environment variable “NASTRAN_VERSION”.

Specifies that properties will be written to the element cards for all elements where it is allowed in MSC.Nastran.

Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates. This can be set to reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should not affect the analysis. It only changes the method used in the grid creation. This determines which coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the GRID entry.

This option is ON by default. This option can be turned OFF to write continuation markers for bulk data entries.

Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The analysis manger does not support this option and must be disabled when using this option.

Determines whether the real number can be written to a standard (8 character) NASTRAN field or to a double (16 character) NASTRAN field.

Grid Precision Digits: 6

Numbering OptionsThis form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parameters form. It allows the user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during translation. For example, if the user types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element properties in the resulting NASTRAN input file will begin at 101.

Note that both the MSC.Patran Neutral file reader and the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran input file reader preserve the IDs of named entities with a “.” syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record of ID 12 will be assigned the name “PSHELL.12.” This last option allows great continuity between input model data and output model data. This option is ON by default and the default Syntax Marker is “.”.

Numbering Options

0Element Properties:

0Material Properties:

0Data Tables:

0Load Sets:

0Load Cases:

0Control Sets:

0Rigid Elements:

0Scalar Points:

Automatic Numbering Offsets:

+ ABegin. Contin. Marker:

Number Only

Beginning Number

Trailing Number

Encoded Syntax

.Syntax Marker:

IDs Encoded in Names:

OK Defaults Cancel

The Begin. Contin. Marker box allows the user to specify the continuation of the mnemonic format used on multiple line, Bulk Data entries.

IDs Encoded in Names allows the user to activate recognition of IDs encoded into the name of any named entity, such as a material.

Number Only will recognize and use an ID if, and only if, the name of the entity is an actual number like “105.” This option is ON by default. Beginning Number will recognize an ID if the number begins the name, such as “52_shell_property.” This option is OFF by default. Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it trails the name, such as “shell_property_52.” This option is OFF by default. Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it directly follows the first occurrence of the specified syntax. For example, with this option activated and the specified syntax set to “.”, the ID assigned to a material given the name “Steel_1027.32” would be 32.


Select File

Select File

OK Filter Cancel

Filter

Selected Input File

Directories Files

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/.

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/..

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/clip

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/*.bdf

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/north.bdf

ids.bdf

ids_1.bdf

north.bdf

3.3 Solution TypesThis subordinate form appears when you select the Solution Type button on the Analysis form. Use this fom to define the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. Your choice for the Solution Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Parameters (p. 183), Subcase Parameters (p. 214), and Output Requests (p. 231). See Table 3-1.

Solution Type

MSC.Nastran

Solution Type

Solution Type:

LINEAR STATIC

NONLINEAR STATIC

NORMAL MODES

BUCKLING

COMPLEX EIGENVALUE

FREQUENCY RESPONSE

TRANSIENT RESPONSE

NONLINEAR TRANSIENT

Solution Parameters...

Solution Sequence: 112

OK Cancel

Linear Static selects MSC.Nastran Solution Sequence (SOL) 101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in SOLs 1 and 101.

Nonlinear Static selects Solution Sequence 66 or 106, depending on the version of MSC.Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL 66, and Version 67 and above yields SOL 106. You may select one or more subcases.

Complex Eigenvalue selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or 29 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase.

Nonlinear Transient selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129, depending on the MSC.Nastran Version. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields SOL 129. You may select only one subcase.

Frequency Response selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For Solution Sequences 108 or 111, multiple subcases may be selected.

Normal Modes selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48 depending on the Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase.

Buckling selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. Only one subcase may be selected that defines the static preload. The buckling subcase is automatically generated. The output requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and constraint forces.

Transient Response selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 27 or 31. For Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases may be selected.

Formulation: Modal

Brings up a Solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows you to specify parameters which apply to the complete solution.

Formulation is only visible when you select Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response. The default formulation for each is modal.

◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆


Table 3-1 Supported MSC.Nastran Solution Sequences

Solution Type Database Run

Cyclic Symmetry Formulation MSC.Nastran

Version

Solution Parameter Settings

Linear Static Off Off -- -- 1Off On -- -- 47On Off -- -- 101On On -- -- 114

Nonlinear Static -- -- -- 66 or Below 66-- -- -- 67 or Above 106

Normal Modes Off Off -- -- 3Off On -- -- 48On Off -- -- 103On On -- -- 115

Buckling Off Off -- -- 5On On -- -- 77On Off -- -- 105

Complex Eigenvalue

Off -- Direct -- 28Off -- Modal -- 29On -- Direct -- 107On -- Modal -- 110

Frequency Response

Off -- Direct -- 26Off -- Modal -- 30On Off Direct -- 108On -- Modal -- 111On On Direct -- 118

Transient Response

Off -- Direct -- 27Off -- Modal -- 31On -- Direct -- 109On -- Modal -- 112

Nonlinear Transient

-- -- -- 66 or Below 99-- -- -- 67 or Above 129

3.4 Direct Text InputThis form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates these entries for any unsupported entries in the input deck. If the data is entered by the user the Write to Input Deck toggle default is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default for the Input Deck toggle is OFF. These entries may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they should be written to any input files subsequently created by the interface, the appropriate Write to Input Deck toggle should be set to ON.

Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input deck before the first subcase. The Direct Text Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text within a subcase definition.

Direct Text Input

Bulk Data Section

File Management Section

Executive Control Section

Case Control Section

Bulk Data Section

FMS Write To Input Deck

EXEC Write To Input Deck

CASE Write To Input Deck

BULK Write To Input Deck

OK Clear Reset Cancel

Switches to determine which data section the MSC.Nastran input would be sent.

Saves the current setting and data for the four sections and closes the form.

Clears the current form.

Resets the form back to the data values it had at the last OK.

Resets all four forms back to its previous value and closes the form.

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆


3.5 Solution Parameters

Linear StaticThis subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when Linear Static is selected. Depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters, this Solution Type will generate a SOL 101, 114, 1, or 47 input file.

Solution Parameters

Static Solution Parameters

Database Run

Cyclic Symmetry

Automatic Constraints

Inertia Relief

Alternate Reduction

Mass Calculation: Lumped

Data Deck Echo: None

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = 0.0

Maximum Printed Lines = 500000

Maximum Run Time = 10

Wt.-Mass Conversion = 1.0

Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. =

Max p-Adaptive Cycles = 3

OK Defaults Cancel

Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or a Rigid Format (SOL 1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is selected.

Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or 47).

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.

Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired. The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is also selected.

Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT card will specify all 6 degrees of freedom.

Shell Normal Tol. Angle =

The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will be used.

This is a list of the data input available for defining the Static Solution Parameters that were not shown on the previous page.

Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL

On Off 101

On On 114

Off Off 1

Off On 47

Parameter Name Description

Shell Normal

Tolerance Angle

Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1; otherwise, it will be set to Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within -1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES case control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time, expressed in CPU minutes, that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME executive control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.


Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter.

Max p-Adaptive Cycles For p-element analysis, this is the maximum number of adaptive analysis that will be performed. If the adaptive analysis converges before this number of cycles is reached, the run will terminate normally.


Nonlinear StaticThis subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form, when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MSC.Nastran version specified is Version 66 or lower, then Solution Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MSC.Nastran version specified is version 67 or higher, then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed. For more information about specification of the MSC.Nastran version number, see the Translation Parameters (p. 176) form.

Solution Parameters

Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters


Large Displacements

Follower Forces

Mass Calculation: Coupled







OK Defaults Cancel

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.

Indicates that displacements, which can cause a difference in the formulation of the stiffness matrix, may be encountered. Therefore, the stiffness matrix may need to be periodically recomputed based on the displaced shape.

Indicates, as the part deflects, that the applied forces will remain aligned with the deformed part rather than maintaining their global orientation. This can only be selected if Large Displacements is also selected.


The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the altered LGDISP parameter setting for each.

This is a list of the data input, available for defining the Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters, that were not shown on the previous page.

Large Displacements Follower Forces LGDISP

Off On -1

On On 1

On Off 2


Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry card images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.


Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.



Normal ModesThis subordinate form appears whenever the Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when Normal Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48 input file, depending on the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below.

Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115 or 48).

Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.

Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115) is to be used or a Rigid Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.

See Dynamic Reduction Parameters (p. 193).

Solution Parameters

Static Solution Parameters

Database Run

Cyclic Symmetry









Max p-Adaptive Cycles = 3

OK Defaults Cancel


Dynamic Reduction...

Eigenvalue Extraction...

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 191). If the version is Version Š 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then these controls are selectable on the Normal Modes Subcase Parameters (p. 221) form.


The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL type for each.


On Off 103

On On 115

Off Off 3

Off On 48

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution Parameters, that were not shown on the previous page.


Shell Normal

Tolerance Angle






Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.



❏ Eigenvalue Extraction Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the eigenvalue extraction controls. If the version is Š 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then these controls are selectable at the subcase level.

❏ Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic reduction controls.


Real Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal Modes, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also appears when the Real Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameter form. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1 and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Eigenvalue Extraction

REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION

Lanczos Extraction Method:

Lower =

Upper =

Frequency Range of Interest

100

Estimated Number of Roots =

10

Number of Desired Roots =

0 Diagnostic Output Level:

Mass Normalization Method:

Normalization Point =

1 Normalization Component:

Results Normalization

OK Cancel

Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this selection is set to Lanczos, an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on the previous page.


Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.


Dynamic Reduction Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal Modes, Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. Use this form to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry.

A flag that indicates whether or not any dynamic reduction is desired.

Indicates the maximum frequency to be considered when performing dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This is the FMAX field.

Indicates which method is to be used in selecting coordinates. This parameter can be set to either Automatic or Manual. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This determines if the program will automatically select the number of generalized coordinates.

Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON and Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. The Application Preference will automatically create this many SPOINTs, and place them in the a-set and the q-set.

Dynamic Reduction

Perform Dynamic Reduction

250

Highest Frequency of Interest =

Automatic Method:

100

Number of Generalized Coordinates =

100

Number of Needed Scalar Points =

Dynamic Reduction Parameters:

OK Cancel

Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON, and Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. This is the NQDES field.

BucklingThis subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file, depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters.

Solution Parameters

Buckling Solution Parameters

Database Run

Cyclic Symmetry










OK Defaults Cancel

Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 105) is to be used or a Rigid Format or unstructured Solution Sequence (SOL 5 or 77). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.

Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part.

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will automatically constrain model singularities.

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 191).


The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL type for each.

This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parameters that were not shown on the previous page.


On Off 105

On On 77

Off Off 5



Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data deck card images are to be printed in the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.






❏ Eigenvalue Extraction Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the eigenvalue extraction controls.

Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Buckling Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data entries, depending on the selected extraction method.

Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If Lanczos is selected, an EIGRL entry will be created. If Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and EIGB entry will be created with the METHOD field set to either INV or SINV specified, respectively.

Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of eigenvalues to be examined. These are the L1 and L2 fields on the EIGB entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL entry.

Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power. This is the NEP field on the EIGB entry.

Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Methods set to Lanczos. This is the NP field on the EIGRL entry.


BUCKLING EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION

Lanczos Extraction Method:

Lower =

Upper =

Eigenvalue Range of Interest

2


1


1

Number of Desired Positive Roots =

1

Number of Desired Negative Roots =

0 Diagnostic Output Level:

Maximum Normalization Method:




OK Cancel


This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction, that was not shown on the previous page.


Number of Desired Positive Roots

Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenvalues to be computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDP field on the EIGB entry.

Number of Desired Negative Roots

Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenvalues to be computed. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDN field on the EIGB entry.

Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value in the range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the NORM field on the EIGB entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This, too, can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGB entry.

Complex EigenvalueThis subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Complex Eigenvalue on the Solution Type form. When you specify the Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form), MSC.Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file.

Solution Parameters

Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters

Database Run









Struct. Damping Coeff. =

Complex Eigenvalue...

Real Eigenvalue...


OK Defaults Cancel

If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 or 110) will be selected. If you deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) will be selected.

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.


See Complex Eigenvalue Extraction (p. 201).




The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type for each.

This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters that was not shown on the previous page.

Database Run Formulation SOL

On Direct 107

On Modal 110

Off Direct 28

Off Modal 29


Shell Normal

Tolerance Angle









Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).

❏ Complex Eigenvalue Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the complex eigenvalue extraction controls.

❏ Real Eigenvalue Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the real eigenvalue extraction controls.

❏ Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic reduction controls.



Complex Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data entry.

Defines the method to use to extract the complex eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Complex Lanczos, Upper Hessenberg, Inverse Power, or Determinate. This defines the setting of the METHOD field.

Defines the real component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the ALPHAAJ fields.


COMPLEX EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION

Extraction Method:

0Alpha of Point A =

0Omega of Point A =

10Alpha of Point B =

1Width of Region =

50


10


Search Region

Maximum Normalization Method:




OK Cancel

Complex Lanczos

10Omega of Point B =

Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGAAJ fields.

Defines the real component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the ALPHABJ fields.

This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on the previous page.


Omega of B Points Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGABJ fields.

Width of Regions Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the LJ fields.

Estimated Number of Roots

Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NEJ fields.

Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NDJ fields.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This is the NORM field on the EIGC entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is the G field on the EIGC bulk data entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Determinate. This is the C field on the EIGC Bulk Data entry.


Frequency ResponseThis subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Frequency Response on the Solution Type form. MSC.Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you specify the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).

Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part, and the appropriate flags will be set. This can only be set if Database Run is selected and Formulation is set to Direct (SOL 118).



If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 108, 111, 118) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 26 or 30) will be selected.

Solution Parameters

Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters

Database Run












OK Defaults Cancel

Residual Vector Computation


Cyclic Symmetry

Residual Vector Computation requests the computation of residual vectors from applied loads. By default the residual vectors are not computed.

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and Cyclic Symmetry parameters, and the altered SOL type for each.

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solution Parameters that were not shown on the previous page.

Database Run Formulation Cyclic Symmetry SOL

On Direct Off 108

On Direct On 118

On Modal -- 111

Off Direct -- 26

Off Modal -- 30


Shell Normal

Tolerance Angle


Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.









Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).

❏ Eigenvalue Extraction Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.

❏ Dynamic Reduction Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.


Transient ResponseThis subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Tranisent Response on the Solution Type form. MSC.Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).

If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 109, 112) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected.

Solution Parameters

Transient Solution Parameters

Database Run


Residual Vector Computation










W3, Damping Factor =




OK Defaults Cancel

These options are only available for a "Modal" solution.

Residual Vector Computation requests the computation of residual vectors from applied loads. By default the residual vectors are not computed.


The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type for each.

This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Parameters that was not shown on the previous page.

Database Run Formulation SOL

On Direct 109

On Modal 112

Off Direct 27

Off Modal 31


Shell Normal

Tolerance Angle


Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.







Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.)

W3, Damping Factor

W4, Damping Factor1

Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of the model.

❏ Eigenvalue Extraction Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.

❏ Dynamic Reduction Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to define the dynamic reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.



Nonlinear TransientThis subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a SOL 129 input file, depending on the version of MSC.Nastran indicated on the translation parameter form. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 129.

Solution Parameters

Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters












OK Defaults Cancel

Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.

Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.

Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in theMSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Large Displacements

Follower Forces

This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters that was not shown on the previous page.







Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.)

W3, Damping Factor

W4, Damping Factor

Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of the model.


3.6 SubcasesThis form appears when the Subcases button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the MSC.Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and various other parameters to be used during part of a complete run. In runs involving superelements, operations on specific superelements can be carried out in different subcases.

The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output requests with each MSC.Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case. You can access the Subcase Parameters and Output Requests forms to view or modify these defaults. You can access the Select Superelements form to include already-created superelements in this analysis job.

Displays all the available subcases associated with the current Solution Sequence.

The subcase name that is being created or modified is displayed in this databox. It can be typed in or picked from the Available Subcases listbox.

Displays the description of the current subcase. The description can be 256 characters long. This is used to generate the SUBTITLE entry.

Displays all the available loadcases in the current database. Only one loadcase can be selected per subcase. For Normal Modes and Complex Eigenvalue solution types, free-free runs can be generated by using an empty load case.

Subcases


Action Create

Available Subcases

Subcase Name

Subcase Description

Available Load Cases

Default

Subcase Options

CancelApply

Second-Load-CasePressure-Case3-g-Pullup

This is the default subcase

Default

Pressure-Case

3-g-Pullup

Default Second-Load-Case

Subcase Parameters...

Output Requests...


Select Superelements...

Options are Create, Delete, and Global Data.

Select Explicit MPCs...

Deleting SubcasesTo delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Delete.


Action Delete

Select Subcases

Apply Cancel

Subcases

3-g-Pullup

Default

Pressure-Case Second-Load-Case

Select the subcase(s) to delete.

Apply to delete the selected subcases.


Editing SubcasesTo edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Global Data. The following form appears.


Action Global Data

Select Subcases

Subcase Options

Output Requests...

Apply Cancel

Subcases

3-g-Pullup

Default

Pressure-Case Second-Load-Case

Use Output Requests... to edit the output requests associated with the selected subcases. The Edit Output Request form

Apply changes the output requests for all selected subcases. Cancel closes the form without changes.

Select Subcase(s) to edit associated data.

Use Output Requests... to edit the output requests associated with the selected subcases. The Edit Output Request form appears. See Edit Output Requests Form (p. 242).

3.7 Subcase ParametersThe subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC.Nastran Case Control that take effect within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the following solution sequences have subcase parameters associated with them.

Solution Sequences Other Conditions Description

Linear Static Subcase Parameters (p. 215)

SOL 101

Model has p-elements and utilizes Version Š 68

Selects the subcase to participate in the error analysis calculations in an adaptive analysis. By default the subcase participates in the error analysis.

Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters (p. 216)

SOL 106, 66

None Selects nonlinear static iteration parameters.

Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters (p. 219)

SOL 129, 99

None Selects nonlinear transient iteration parameters.

Normal Modes Subcase Parameters (p. 221)

SOL 103

Version Š 68 Selects real eigenvalue extraction parameters.


Linear Static Subcase ParametersThis form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that contain p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. This toggle sets the ADACT Case Control command.

Subcase Parameters

Perform Error Analysis

OK Cancel

Nonlinear Static Subcase ParametersThis subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of the parameters that control the interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is part of the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. If Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the NLPCI bulk data entry is generated.

Subcase Parameters

Static Nonlinear Iterations

Number of Load Increments = 10

Matrix Update Method: Automatic

Number of Iterations per Update =

Allowable Iterations per Increment =

Convergence Criteria

Displacement Error

Displacement Tolerance = 1.0e-03

Load Error

Load Tolerance = 0.01

Work Error

Work Tolerance = 0.01

OK

Defines the number of increments to be used to apply the full load. This is the NINC field.

Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. Matrix updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of three settings: Automatic, Semi-Automatic, or Controlled Iter. This defines the setting of the KMETHOD field.

Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.

Defines the number of iterations to be used after each matrix update. This is the KSTEP field.

5

25

Arc-Length Method ...

Buckling

Normal Modes Buckling

Cancel

Opens a subordinate form to activate the Arc-Length Method which is turned OFF by default. The Arc-Length Method is used to explore post-buckling paths.

Opens subordinate form to define eigenvalue extraction parameters.

Normal Modes

Activates a normal mode analysis of the prestressed system at the end of the subcase.

Activates a buckling analysis at the end of the subcase.


This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown on the previous page.


Displacement Error

Displacement Tolerance

Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on displacements. The displacement tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.

Load Error

Load Tolerance

Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on load equilibrium. The load equilibrium tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field.

Work Error

Work Tolerance

Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on work error. The work tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field.

Arc-Length Method ParametersThis subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on the Subcase Parameters form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length Method. All of the data is part of the NLPCI bulk data entry.

Arc-Length Method Parameters

CRISConstraint type:

Min. Adjust. ratio (MINALR) =

Max. Adjust. ratio (MAXALR) =

Scale Facter (W) =

OK

Defines the type of Arc-Length Method:

CRIS = Crisfield method (default)RIKS = Riks methodMRIKS = modified Riks method

Maximum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for the adaptive arc-length method MAXALR≥1.0.

Minimum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for the adaptive arc-length method 0.0≤MINALR≤1.0.

Cancel

Use Arc-Length Method

Convergence Iterations =

Max. controlled Increment Steps =

Defaults

Scale factor w for arc-length criteria:

w=0, displacement controlw>0, combined load and displacements controlw»1, load control

Desired number of iterations for convergence to be used for the adaptive arc-length adjustments. This is the DESITER field

0.25

4.00

0.0

12

20

Maximum number of controlled increment steps allowed within the subcase. This is the MXINC field.


Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase ParametersThis subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry.

Subcase Parameters

Ending Time =

Number of Time Steps =

Transient Nonlinear Iterations

Matrix Update Method: Adaptive

Number of Time Steps per Update =

2

Number of Bisections per Update =

2

Allowable Iterations per Time Step =

10

Convergence Criteria

Displacement Error

Displacement Tolerance = 1.0e-02

Load Error

Load Tolerance = 1.0e-03

Work Error

Work Tolerance = 1.0e-06

Exit on Failure to Converge

OK Cancel

Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. The Mass matrix updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of three settings: Adaptive, Automatic, or Time Step. This is the METHOD field.

Defines the number of time steps to be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Time Step. This is the NDT field.

Defines the maximum number of time step bisections to be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Adaptive. This is the MAXBIS field.

Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.

Defines the Ending Time and Number of Time Steps for the subcase.

1.0

100

Static Solution

This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown on the previous page.


Displacement Error

Displacement Tolerance

Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on displacements that must be met between interactions to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.

Load Error

Load Tolerance

Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on load equilibrium that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field.

Work Error

Work Tolerance

Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on work error that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field.


Normal Modes Subcase ParametersThe Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran Version 70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this is set to Lanczos, this indicates that an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION

Extraction Method: Lanczos

Frequency Range of Interest

Lower =

Upper =

Estimated Number of Roots = 100

Number of Desired Roots = 10

Diagnostic Output Level: 0


Normalization Method: Mass


Normalization Component: 1

Number of Modes in Error Analysis =

10

OK Cancel

Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1 and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Subcase Parameters



This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on the previous page.


Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Number of Modes in Error Analysis

Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis when the model contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT Case Control command.


Transient Response Subcase ParametersThis subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step interval and duration for a transient response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data entry.

Direct Transient Solution

Modal Transient Solution

This is the subcase Parameters form for a Modal Transient solution.

Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.

Subcase Parameters

TRANSIENT RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS

Time Recovery Points

DEFINE TIME STEPS...

OK Cancel

Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.

Use this button to define your TABDMP1 entry. You must enter at least one value of frequency and damping on the spreadsheet for damping to occur.

Subcase Parameters

TRANSIENT RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS

Time Recovery Points

DEFINE TIME STEPS...

Modal Damping None

DEFINE MODAL DAMPING...

OK Defaults Cancel

Define Time Step

Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Time Increment) must be positive. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TSTEP for more information.

Define Time Step

Input Data

Add Row Clear All Delete Row

OK Defaults Cancel

3

5

4

2

1

7

6

No. of Time Steps Delta-T Skip Factor

100 1.

The "Skip Factor" column is optional. If the column is empty, MSC.Nastran assumes the Skip Factor is 1.

"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, select click on the row label and select "Add Row".

No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in time. The skip factor defines which of the solution points you wish to perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1 indicates every time step, 2 indicates every other solution step, etc. Total solution time accumulates in order of entry.

For the example shown, MSC.Nastran will calculate output at 100 time steps ranging between 1. and 100.


Define Damping

Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last entries in the table. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TABDMP1 for more information.

Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entries in the modal damping data. This will cause an error in MSC.Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such scenario.

If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same.

"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on the row label and select "Add Row".

Define Damping

Input Data


OK Cancel

3

5

4

2

1

7

9

8

6

Frequency Value

10

Frequency Response Subcase ParametersThis subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencies for a frequency response analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry.

Direct Frequency Solution

This is the Direct Frequency Subcase Parameter Form.

Use this button to define frequencies.

Subcase Parameters

FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS

FREQUENCY RECOVERY POINTS

DEFINE FREQUENCIES...

OK Cancel


Use this form to create FREQi entries.

The driving column on this form is the Increment type.

When the Increment type is... MSC.Patran...

Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ card. End Freq. and No. Incr. columns are not used.

Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between.

Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.

Define Frequencies

Input Data 0.Type: Logarithmic


OK Defaults Cancel

1

Start Freq. End Freq. No. Incr. Incr. Type

0. 250. 100 Logarithmic


Modal Frequency Solution

This is the subcase Parameters form for a Modal Frequency solution.

Subcase Parameters

FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS

FREQUENCY RECOVERY POINTS

DEFINE FREQUENCIES...

Modal Damping None

DEFINE MODAL DAMPING...

OK Defaults Cancel

Use this button to define FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2,FREQ3, FREQ4 entries.

Use this button to define a TABDMP1 entry. At least one value of frequency and damping must be entered on the spreadsheet for damping to occur.


Define Frequencies

Use this form to create FREQi entries.

The driving column on this form is the Increment type.

When the Increment Type is... MSC.Patran...

Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ card. End Freq, No. Incr. and Cluster/Spread columns are not used.

Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. The Cluster/Spread column is not used.

Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.

Lin. Cluster Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear distribution of solution frequencies between each successive pair of natural modes in the specified frequency interval. The Cluster value, which has a default of 1.0 is used to bias the linear distribution of solution frequencies. A smaller cluster value has a closer spacing towards the center, CLUSTER greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the ends of the frequency range.

Define Frequencies

Input Data 0.Type: Logarithmic


OK Defaults Cancel

1

Start Freq. End Freq. No. Incr. Incr. Type Cluster/Spread

0.01 250. 100 Logarithmic


Define Damping

Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last entries in the table. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TABDMP1 for more information.

Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entry in the modal damping data. This will cause an error in MSC.Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such scenario.

If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same.

Log. Cluster Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used between the start and end frequencies.

Spread Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a fractional amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No. Incr. of 21, there will be 21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN and 1.3*FN, where FN a natural frequency, for all natural frequencies between the specified “Start Freq” and “End Freq” values.

Define Damping

Input Data


OK Cancel

3

5

4

2

1

7

9

8

6

Frequency Value

10



3.8 Output RequestsThis allows the definition of what data is desired from the analysis code in the form of results. The form consists of two formats: Basic and Advanced. The Basic form retains the simplicity of being able to specify the output requests over the entire model and uses the default settings of MSC.Nastran Case Control commands. There is a special set defined in MSC.Patran called ALL FEM. This set represents all nodes and elements associated with Object defined on the Analysis Form (p. 173). This default set is used for all output requests in the Basic Output Requests (p. 232) form.

The Advanced version of this form allows the user to vary these default options. Since output requests have to be appropriate to the type of analysis, the form changes depending on the solution sequence. The Advanced Output Requests (p. 233) also adds the capability of being able to associate a given output request to a subset of the model using MSC.Patran groups. This capability can be used effectively in significantly reducing the results that are created for a model, optimizing the sizes and translation times of output files. The creation of MSC.Patran groups are documented in Group>Create (p. 214) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

The results types that will be brought into MSC.Patran due to any of these requests, are documented in Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities (p. 277). In that chapter, tables are presented that correlate the MSC.Nastran results block, and the MSC.Patran primary and secondary results labels with the various output requests.

Note: Many of the output requests that can be defined on the Output Request forms currently apply only to the printed values in the MSC.Nastran output file; these result quantities cannot be imported and postprocessed in MSC.Patran. For guidance on specific quantities, review Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities (p. 277).

Basic Output RequestsThis form is used to select output requests with their default options. The set is always All FEM, which means results for all nodes or elements in the model. A default set of output requests is always preselected.

SUBCASE NAME: Default

SOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101

Form Type: Basic

Select Result Type

Displacements Element Stresses Constraint Forces Multi-Point Constraints Forces Element Forces

Element Strain Energies Element Strains

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM;BY=0STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CORNER)=All FEMSPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

Delete

OK Defaults Cancel

ESE=ALL FEM

Output Requests

Applied Loads

This listbox displays the appropriate result types that may be selected for the solution sequence indicated at the top of the form. The output requests are selected one at a time by clicking.

This listbox displays the selected output requests for the subcase shown at the top of the form.

Output Requests

This option menu is used to switch between the advanced and basic versions of this form.

The Delete button deletes the output request highlighted in the Output Requests listbox.

Note: The OK button accepts the output requests and closes the form. The Defaults button deletes all output requests and replaces them with defaults. The Cancel button closes the form without saving the output requests.

The available output requests depend on the active Solution Sequence as indicated by this value.


Advanced Output RequestsThis form provides great flexibility in creating output requests. Output requests may be associated with different groups (SET options in MSC.Nastran) as well as different superelements1. The output requests available depend on the chosen Solution Types (p. 180), Solution Parameters (p. 183), and Translation Parameters (p. 176). The Advanced Output Requests form is sensitive to the Result Type selected. The Form Type, Delete, OK, Defaults, and Cancel buttons operate exactly like on the Basic Output Requests (p. 232) form.

A description of the output requests and their associated options are listed in Table 3-2 and Table 3-3.

1At the present time, superelement specifications are allowed only in the structured linear static solution type (Solution Sequence 101).

SUBCASE NAME: DefaultSOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101

Form Type: Advanced

Select Result Type

Element Stresses Constraint Forces Multi-Point Constraints Forces Element Forces

Applied Loads

Element Strain Energies

Element Strains

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM;BY=0

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CORNER)=

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

Create

Delete

OK Defaults Cancel

Select Group/SET

All FEMdefault_group

Options

Sorting: By Grid Points

Format: Rectangular

Tensor: von Mises

Element Points: Cubic/Corner

Plate Strain Curv: Strcur

Composite Plate Opt: Element Stresses

Adaptive Cycle Output Interval = 0

Output Requests

This listbox is used to select the group to which the output requests relate.

These are the options that are appropriate to the highlighted result type. They also indicate the options that were selected for a highlighted output request. See Table 3-2.

Displacements

Use this list box to select output requests that are to be modified or deleted.

This button creates output requests for highlighted result types. It also modifies highlighted output requests. The button label changes to reflect the operation.

Use this listbox to select the result type to be created.

Output Request

Suppress Print for Result Type

This databox appears for SOL 101 and 103 when the model contains p-elements. Other options will be presented, such as Percent of Step Output and Intermediate Output Options depending on conditions listed in Table 3-3.


Table 3-2 Output Request Descriptions

Output RequestCase Control

Command or Bulk Data Entry

Description

Displacements DISPLACEMENT Requests nodal displacements.

Eigenvectors VECTOR Requests nodal eigenvectors.

Element Stresses STRESS Requests elemental stresses.

Constraint Forces SPCFORCES Requests forces of single- point constraints.

MultiPoint Constraint Forces

MPCFORCES Requests forces of multipoint constraints (for versions 68 or higher).

Element Forces FORCE Requests elemental forces.

Applied Loads OLOAD Requests equivalent nodal applied loads.

Nonlinear Applied Loads NLLOAD Requests equivalent nonlinear applied loads. Sorting and format options are not allowed with this request.

Element Strain Energies ESE Requests elemental strain energies and energy densities. No options are allowed with this output request.

Element Strains STRAIN Requests elemental strains.

Grid Point Stresses GPSTRESS Requests stresses at grid points.

Velocities VELOCITY Requests nodal velocities.

Accelerations ACCELERATION Requests nodal accelerations.

Grid Point Force Balance GPFORCE Requests grid point force balance at nodes. Sorting and format options are not allowed with this request.

Grid Point Stress Discontinuities

GPSDCON Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on grid point stresses.

Element Stress Discontinuity

ELSDCON Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on element stresses.

Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options

Options Label

Case Control or Bulk Data Options

GroupsMultiple Select

AllowedDescriptions

Sorting By Nodes/Elements

SORT1 Elements No Output is presented as tabular listing of nodes/elements for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time.

By Frequency/Time

SORT2 Elements No Output is presented as tabular listing of frequency/time for each node or element type.

Format Rectangular REAL Elements No Requests real and imaginary format for complex output.

Polar PHASE Elements No Requests magnitude and phase format for complex output.

Tensor Von Mises VONMISES Elements No Requests von Mises stresses or strains.

Maximum Shear

MAXS Elements No Requests Maximum shear or Octahedral stresses or strains.

Element Points

Corner CORNER Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center.

Strain Gage SGAGE Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using the strain gage approach.

Bilinear BILIN Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using bilinear extrapolation.

Center CENTER Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the center only.

Composite Plate Options

Element Stresses

NOCOMPS= -1, LSTRN = 0 in Bulk Data

Elements: Surfaces

No Composite element ply stresses and failure indices are suppressed. Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output.

Ply Stresses NOCOMPS=1,LSTRN = 0 in Bulk Data

Elements: Surfaces

No Composite element ply stresses and failure indices are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites.


Composite Plate Options

Ply Strains NOCOMPS=1,LSTRN = 1 in Bulk Data

Elements: Surfaces

No Composite element ply strains and failure indices are output. Model should contain PCOMP card defining composites.

Element and Ply Stresses

NOCOMPS=0,LSTRN=0 in Bulk Data

Elements: Surfaces

No Composite element ply stresses and failure indices as well as Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites.

Element and Ply Strains

NOCOMPS=0,LSTRN=1 in Bulk Data

Elements: Surfaces

No Composite element ply strains and failure indices as well as Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites.

Plate Strain Options

Plane & Curv.

STRCUR Elements: Surfaces

No This option is available for Element Strains output requests only. Strains and curvatures are output at the reference plane for plate elements.

Fiber FIBER Elements: Surfaces

No This option is available for Element Strains output requests only. Strains at locations Z1 and Z2 (specified under element properties) are output at the reference plane for plate elements.

Sorting By Nodes /Elements

SORT1 Nodes No Output is presented as tabular listing of nodes/elements for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time.

By Frequency/Time

SORT2 Nodes No Output is presented as tabular listing of frequency/time for each node or element type.

Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued)

Options Label



AllowedDescriptions

Format Rectangular REAL Nodes No Requests real and imaginary format for complex output.

Polar PHASE Nodes No Requests magnitude and phase format for complex output.

Output Coordinate

Coord COORD CID Elements:Surfaces, Volumes

Yes Selects the output coordinate frame for grid point stress output. Coord 0 is the basic coordinate frame.

Volume Output

Both Blank Elements:Volumes

Yes Requests direct stress, principal stresses, direction cosines, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output.

Principal PRINCIPAL Elements:Volumes

Yes Requests principal stresses, direction cosines, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output.

Direct DIRECT Elements:Volumes

Yes Requests direct stress, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output.

Fiber All FIBER, ALL Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at all fibre locations, that is at Z1, Z2 and the reference plane. Z1 and Z2 distances are specified as element properties (default Z1=-thickness/2, Z2= +thickness/2).


Options Label



AllowedDescriptions


Fiber Mid FIBER, MID Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at the reference plane.

Z1 FIBER, Z1 Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at distance Z1 from the reference plane (default Z1=-thickness/2).

Z2 FIBER, Z2 Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at distance Z2 from the reference plane (default Z2=+thickness/2).

Normal X1 NORMAL X1

Elements: Surfaces,

Yes Specifies the x-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output.

X2 NORMAL X2

Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies the y-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output.

X3 NORMAL X3

Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies the z-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output.

Method Topological TOPOLOGI-CAL

Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies the topological method for calculating average grid point stresses. This is the default.

Geometric GEOMETRIC

Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies the geometric interpolation method for calculating average grid point stresses. This method should be used when there are large differences in slope between adjacent elements.


Options Label



AllowedDescriptions

X-axis of Basic Coord

X1 AXIS, X1 Elements: Surfaces

Yes Specifies that the x-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used.

X-axis of Basic Coord


Yes Specifies that the y-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used.


Yes Specifies that the z-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used.

Branch Break BREAK Elements: Surfaces

Yes Treats multiple element intersections as stress discontinuities in the geometric interpolation method.

No Break NOBREAK Elements: Surfaces

Yes Does not treat multiple element intersections as stress discontinuities in the geometric interpolation method.

Tolerance 0.0 TOL=0.0 Elements: Surfaces

Yes Defines the tolerance to be used for interelement slope differences. Slopes beyond this tolerance will signify discontinuous stresses.

Percent of Step Output

100 NOi Field of TSTEP and TSTEPNL entry

All Once per subcase

An integer ‘n’ that specifies the percentage of intermediate outputs to be presented for transient and nonlinear transient analyses.


Options Label



AllowedDescriptions


Adaptive Cycle Output Interval

0 BY = n on OUTPUT Bulk Data entry

p-elements

Once per subcase

An integer ‘n’ that requests intermediate outputs for each nth adaptive cycle. For n=0, only the last adaptive cycle results are output. This is available for SOLs 101 and 103 for versions 68 and higher.

Intermediate Output Options

Yes INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry


Intermediate outputs are requested for every computed load increment. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only.

No INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry


Intermediate outputs are requested for the last load of the subcase. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only.

All INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry


Intermediate outputs are requested for every computed and user-specified load increment. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only.


N/A Specifies PLOT option instead of PRINT on the Case Control Output request entry.

All Yes Print to the .f06 file is suppressed for the result type when this is selected.


Options Label



AllowedDescriptions

Edit Output Requests FormUse this form to edit the outputs request associated with selected subcases. To access this form, select the Output Requests button on the Subcases form with the Action set to Global Data.

Edit Output Requests

SOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101

RESULT TYPE: Displacements

OUTPUT REQUEST: DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

Select Group(s)/SET

All FEMdefault_group

Options

Sorting: By Node/Element

Format: Rectangular

Tensor: Von Mises

Element Points: Bilinear

Plate Strain Curv: Plane & Curv.

Composite Plate Opt: Element Stresses


OK Default

Subcase Defaults Clear Cell(s)

OK Cancel

Element StressesDisplacements

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,B>DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL>

STRESS(SORT2,PHASE,MAX,BILI>DISPLACEMENT(SORT2,REAL)=ALL>

STRESS(SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,>DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL>

Test1

Test2

Test3

The top half of the form changes based on what cell or column of cells are selected.

Clears the selected cells. You can select individual cells, multiple cells in a column, entire columns, or entire rows.

Closes the form and saves the selected changes. To apply the new output requests, you must select Apply on the parent Subcases/Global Data form.

Selecting the Default button when a single cell is selected resets the selected output request to its default setting.

The row labels for the spreadsheet are the selected subcases from the parent form. The Output Requests for each subcase are stored in cells of the spreadsheet.

Inactive (greyed out) until a subcase label (column 1) is selected. When this button is selected, the top half of the form will become inactive, and the default output request function (named user_change_default_out_req) will be called. This will load user defined defaults or the system defined defaults if user ones do not exist.


Notes:

• The Edit Output Requests form opens with focus in the first result type of the first subcase.

• The top half of the Edit Output Requests form is similar to the Advanced Output Request form.

• The spreadsheet column labels are the result types for the current solution type.

• Putting focus in a cell causes the top half of the form to reflect the current setting, just like the current advanced output request form. This means that the databox RESULT TYPE: gets updated with the result type of the currently selected cell. The OUTPUT REQUESTS: databox is also updated to show the actual content of the cell.

• If a cell is initially empty, selecting it will cause the top half of the form to display the appropriate default setting for the selected result type (i.e., column).

• Selecting a column header will allow you to change all subcase output requests of a particular type. The top half of the Edit Output Requests form will set to the default request of the particular result type.

• When you select a set of contiguous column cells, the top half of the form will configure to the upper most selected cell.

• You cannot select multiple columns.

Default Output Request InformationIn order to make use of this new feature you will need to create a PCL file that contains the function user_change_default_out_req which will overwrite the existing default file in MSC.Patran. This new PCL file will need to be compiled and then the resulting library (.plb) will need to be loaded into Patran. This can be done using the p3midilog.pcl or the p3epilog.pcl file.

The user_change_default_out_req function makes use of the mscn_user_add_out_req and the mscn_user_del_out_req functions to add and delete default Output Request types. These two functions are defined as follows:

Code SampleFUNTION user_change_default_out_req(sol_seq)INTEGER sol_seqIF (sol_seq == 101 || sol_seq == 106) THEN/* This will add this version of the Output Request type to the list of default *//* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */

mscn_user_add_out_req (4,”MPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=ALL FEM”)/* This will add the default version of these Output Request types from the list *//* of default Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */

mscn_user_add_out_req (10,“ ”)mscn_user_add_out_req (6,“ ”)

/* This will delete these Output Request types from the list of default *//* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */

mscn_user_del_out_req (1)mscn_user_del_out_req (2)mscn_user_del_out_req (3)

END IFEND FUNCTION

mscn_user_add_out_req (or_num, or_value)

Description:This function adds either a specified version or a default version of an Output Request type to the list of default Output Requests. Input:INTEGER or_num The OR number of the output request type to add (See Table 3-

4). STRING or_value The value of the selected output request type. Blank implies the

default value.

mscn_user_del_out_req (or_num)

Description:This function deletes the specified Output Request type from the list of default Output Requests. Input:INTEGER or_num The OR number of the Output Request type to delete (See

Table 3-4).


The following is a table that shows the current predefined default Output Requests (those marked with an X) and the allowed options (those marked with an O) for the various solution sequences.

where:

1 = Displacement, 2 = stress, 3 = spcforces, 4 = mpcforces, 5 = forces, 6 = oload, 7 = nlload, 8 = ese, 9 = strain, 10 = gpstress, 11 = velocity, 12 = acceleration, 13 = gpforce, 14 = gpsdcon, 15 = elsdcon, 16 = vector, 17 = thermal, 18 = flux, 19 = ht_oload, 20 = ht_spcforces, 21 =enthalpy, 22 = hdot

Table 3-4

Result ID Number

(Solution Sequence)

OR Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

101 x x x o o o o o o o o o o o o

103 o o x o o o o o o o x

105 x o x o o o o o o o o x

106 x x x o o o o o

107 o o x o o o x

108 x o x o o o o o o o

109 x o x o o o o o o o o o

110 o o x o o o x


112 x o x o o o o o o o o o

114 x x x o o o o o o o x o o

115 o o x o o o o o o o


153 o o o o o o x x o o

159 o o o o o o x x o o o o

OR # Default Value

1 DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

2 STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=All FEM;PARAM,NOCOMPS,-1

3 SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

4 MPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

5 FORCE(SORT1,REAL,BILIN)=All FEM

6 OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

7 NLLOAD=All FEM

8 ESE=All FEM

9 STRAIN(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,STRCUR,BILIN)=All FEM

10 GPSTRESS=All FEM; VOLUME # SET,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL,BRANCH BREAK

11 VELOCITY(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

12 ACCELERATION(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

13 GPFORCE=All FEM

14 GPSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK

15 ELSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK

16 VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM

17 THERMAL=(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

18 FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

19 OLOAD(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

20 SPCFORCES(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

21 ENTHALPY(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

22 HDOT(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

Note: In SOL 109, 112 & 159 will have SORT2 as the default in some versions of MSC.Patran.


Subcases Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries into the Case Control section for the defined subcase.

Direct Text Input

Write To Input Deck

OK Clear Reset Cancel

Directly entered entries may potentially conflict with those created by the interface. Writing these entries to the file can be controlled with this toggle.

Saves the current setting and data for the four sections and closes the form.

Clears the current form.

Resets the form back to the data values it had at the last OK.

Resets all four forms back to its previous value and closes the form.

3.9 Select SuperelementsThe superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The superelements for a subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button unselects all the superelements.

Select Superelements:

Available Superelements

superelement 1superelement 2superelement 3superelement 4

OK Defaults Cancel


3.10 Select Explicit MPCs...The Explict MPCs created in the Element menu can be selected for a given subcase. The highlight of selected Explicit MPCs is supportedwhen this form is displayed. The All MPCs toggle indicates that all the Explicit MPCs already created or created later will be used for the subcase being created. The All MPCs toggle should be turned OFF in order to select MPCs. ‘MPXADD SID’ is the ID used for identifying the selected MPCs for the subcase.

Select Explicit MPCs:

Available MPCs

1 2 3 4

OK Defaults Cancel

All MPCs

MPCADD SID =

3.11 Subcase SelectThis form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis form. This form is used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an analysis job.

Displays all the available subcases for the current solution sequence. The current solution sequence is displayed at the top of the form.

Displays all subcases that have been associated with the current job name.

Subcase Select

Subcases For Solution Sequence: 101

Default

Subcases Selected:

Default

OK Cancel

Second-Load-Case Pressure-Case3-g-Pullup

Select All Unselect All◆◆ ◆◆


3.12 Restart ParametersThis format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Analyze and the Object is Restart. Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) Solution Sequences. Linear and Nonlinear Static jobs can be restarted as Linear or Nonlinear Static. Normal Modes jobs can be restarted as Frequency Response, or Transient Response. The DBALL and the MASTER files for the initial job must be present in the current directory when the restart job is submitted.The Restart Parameters button on the main analysis form allows the user to enter information about where to resume the analysis. The MSC.Patran Analysis Manager User’s Manual contains more information on how to submit restart jobs with Analysis Manager.

Analysis

AnalyzeAction:

RestartObject:

Code:

Type:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Select an Initial Job

Apply

Analysis DeckMethod:

Available Restart Jobs

Restart Job Name


Solution Type...

Analysis Manager...

Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

List of names for existing analysis jobs. Select the jobname of the analysis to restart from.

List of names for existing restart jobs. Select the name of an existing restart job or enter the name for a new restart job in the databox below.

Name to use for the restart job. An existing restart job may be modified and/or resubmitted by making a selection from the Available Restart Jobs listbox.

Subcases...

Subcase Select...

Restart Parameters...


Linear Static/Normal Modes

This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the solution type of the initial job is Linear Static or Normal Modes.

Set Restart Parameters

Restart Parameters:

Start from Version Number =

LAST

Save Old Restart Data

OK Cancel

Defines the version number from which to restart. This is the VERSION field on the RESTART file management statement.

Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.


Nonlinear Static

This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the solution type is Nonlinear Static.

Set Restart Parameters

Restart Parameters:

Start from Version Number =

LAST

Start from Increment Number (LOOPID) =

0

Start from Subcase Number (SUBID+1) =

0

Save Old Restart Data

OK Cancel

Defines the version number to restart the analysis from. This is the VERSION field on the RESTART File Management statement.

Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.

Defines the increment number to start the analysis from. This is the value of the PARAM,LOOPID Bulk Data entry.

Defines the subcase number to start from in the list of subcases for this job. The value entered should be one greater than the SUBID from the initial job’s print file (*.f06). This is the value of the PARAM,SUBID Bulk Data entry.

3.13 OptimizeThis form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis run, select Optimize as the Action.

Analysis

Action: Optimize

Object: Entire Model

Method: Full Run

Code:

Type:

Study:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Available Jobs

Job Name

test3

Job Description

MSC.Nastran job


Optimization Parameters...


Subcases...

Subcase Select...

Analysis Manager...

Apply

created on 09-Oct-97

List of already existing jobs.

Sets up the menu for Optimization Analysis.

Brings up the Optimization Parameters (p. 255)menu for Global and Optimization Analysis Parameters.

Brings up the Subcases (p. 256) form that creates a subcase whose solution type can be changed at the time of subcase creation.

Brings up the Subcase Select Optimize (p. 258)form to select subcases with different solution sequences.


Optimization ParametersThis form appears when the Optimization Parameters button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form. It is used to define optimization parameter for the job.

Optimization Parameters

Automatic Constraints. Use Shell Normals.

Mass Calculation: Lumped Data Deck Echo: None

Tolerance Angle = 20. Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = 0.0

Maximum Printed Lines = 999999999Maximum Run Time = 600

Wt.-Mass Conversion = 1.0 Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. =

Maximum Number of Design cycles (DESMAX) = 5

Design Data to be Printed (P2):Objective and design variables. Pproperties.Constraints. Responses.

Print Design Data (P1) every n-th cycle where n = 0

Print Analysis Results (NASPRT) every n-th cycle where n = 0

Relative Objective Convergence (CONV1) = 0.001

Absolute Objective Convergence (CONV2) = 1e-20

Relative Convergence on Design Variables (CONVDV) = 0.001

Relative Convergence on Properties (CONVPR) = 0.01

Fractional Property Change (DELP) = 0.2

Fractional Design Variable Change (DELX) = 1.0

Minimum Property Move Limit (DPMIN) = 0.01

Minimum Design Variable Move Limit (DXMIN) = 0.05

Apply Defaults Cancel

These are the criteria for the objective function, design variable, and design properties which an optimizer uses to determine whether the design optimization process converges or not. Relaxing these criteria, in general, may reduce the number of design cycles for an optimization job to terminate.

During any optimiza-tion design cycle, the change in the properties and design variables are limited to maintain a good approximate model. Parameters DELP and DELX are used to specify such a move limit. DPMIN and DXMIN are used to provide a minimum change to avoid numerical difficulties.

Parameter P2 controls what type of design data or optimization results are printed in an f06 file. Toggle selec-tion is accumulative. Parameter P1 controls how often design data are written. Default (P1=0) prints initial results and final results (if an optimization task is performed).

SubcasesThis form appears when the Subcases button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form.

Subcases

Solution Type: 101 LINEAR STATIC

Available SubcasesDefault

Subcase Name

Subcase Description

Available Load CasesDefault

Constraints in Current Subcase

Subcase Options

Subcase Parameters...

Output Requests...


Select Superelements...

Apply Delete Cancel

List of the associated constraints with the selected subcase.

Displays all the available subcase based on the solution type selection.

The subcase name that is being created.

Subcase description which can be up to 256 characters long.

List of available loadcases.

Displays the Subcase Parameters form. For more information see Subcase Parameters (p. 257).


Subcase Parameters

This form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form.

Subcase Parameters

Inertia Relief

Alternate Reduction

OK Cancel

Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired. The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is also selected.

Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT card will specify all 6 degrees of freedom.

Subcase Select OptimizeThis form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form. This form is used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an optimization analysis job.

Subcase Select

Current Job: test3

Solution Type: 101 LINEAR STATIC

Subcases Available:

Default

Select All Unselect All

Subcases Selected:

OK Clear Cancel

Used to filter the subcases by their solution type

List of subcases based on the solution type setting.

List of the selected subcases.101 Default103 Default

◆◆◆


3.14 Interactive AnalysisThe MSC.Patran Preference for MSC.Nastran has a new capability that enables the user to perform visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a good modal analysis solution with MSC.Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response solution is then directed from a special set of MSC.Patran menus (wizard). The wizard assists the user in applying the desired loads, specifying damping, selecting result entities, and defining solution criteria for an automated fast restart in Nastran effected from the modal database selected. MSC.Patran running as the client spawns a fast restart job to Nastran functioning as a server. Solution results are automatically returned to the client for visualization. This procedure suggests that there might be several benefits to using this product. The wizard provides a guide for problem definition, minimizing confusion associated with general-purpose menu structures. The fast restart, as the name suggests, is fast, and is executed automatically, as are the client-server connections and the data transmission. The reduced solution space of the fast restart minimizes the amount of result data that is calculated, stored, transmitted, and displayed. The net result is the ability to quickly apply discrete loads to the structure and immediately visualize the response at select grids or elements of the model. The real time solution paradigm of the interactive scheme does not provide fringe or contour plots of the global structural response.

Assumptions. Interactive modal frequency response requires that a normal modes analysis of the structure has been completed using Nastran, and that a .DBALL/MASTER database exists containing the model data and the normal modes solution. Currently, the interactive paradigm presumes the Nastran executable, the modal database, and the MSC.Patran executable are all located in the same directory. To maintain optimal performance, licensing and security should be local also. Given these initial conditions, the following scenarios exist for performing interactive frequency response.

Scenario 1. If the initial normal modes analysis was modeled in MSC.Patran, then that MSC.Patran database should be selected under File/Open when starting MSC.Patran. This provides the user with the model from which to exercise the interactive frequency response wizard, provided the correct flag was set to precondition the Nastran normal modes database for this purpose. This is done in MSC.Patran by going to Analysis/Solution Type/Interactive Modal Analysis, and activating the check box.

Scenario 2. The normal modes model may have been built and run without using MSC.Patran. If the user intends to use the MSC integrated product to proceed with interactive frequency response, then special care must be taken when preparing the NASTRAN input file for the normal modes analysis. Specifically, the Nastran normal modes input file must contain the following statement just before the CEND delimiter:

include `SSSALTERDIR:run0.V2001`

Note that both “ticks” are right handed and that SSSALTERDIR must be capitalized. Nastran then creates an environment variable called SSSALTERDIR which points to where the sssalters are located when performing a standard installation.

If the user does not have a standard Nastran installation, then he will be required to specify the full directory path. For example, if the file run0.V2001 is located in the directory /scr2/mike/tmp, then he must include the following statement just prior to the CEND delimiter:

include `/scr2/mike/tmp/run0.V2001`

This include statement provides the DMAP alter required to precondition the large modal database. This conditioning enables efficient data manipulation during the interactive frequency response solution phase.

Under this scenario, the model data will need to be imported by starting MSC.Patran and requesting “Read Input File” from the Analysis Menu. This procedure is described in greater detail in Chapter 5 of this user’s guide, and constitutes reading a NASTRAN Input File for the model data. Once the model data is placed in the MSC.Patran database, interactive frequency response can proceed.

The Process. Scenario 1 or 2 above can be followed to provide a MSC.Patran database with a data model suitable for performing interactive frequency response. The Analysis menu shown below controls the interactive analysis process. Submenus for Select NASTRAN .DBALL, Create Loading, Output Requests, Create a Field, and Define Frequencies are discussed.

Solution Type--Is currently fixed to Frequency Response (Modal Frequency Response) as the only solution available in interactive analysis format. Subsequent versions of Nastran and MSC.Patran may expand this capability to other solution types.

Loading Menu--The loading menu provides a spreadsheet to guide the user through load and boundary condition application.

Miscellaneous. The Interactive Modal Frequency response solution process is staged, in the sense that a normal mode solution is performed first to create what we refer to as the large database (so named for obvious reasons), and then a fast restart procedure is used to develop the frequency response. The normal modes solution is where the user specifies any weight to mass conversion quantities (see PARAM, WTMASS) as well as a specification of the mass matrix formulation desired (see PARAM, COUPMASS). The mass units and desired mass matrix formulation then, are automatically accounted for in the subsequent determination of the frequency response quantities calculated.


Analysis Form

Analysis

Action: Analyze

Object: Interactive

Method: Full Run

Code:

Type:

Study:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Select Nastran .DBALL...

Create Loading...

Output Requests...

View Results...

Apply

Interactive Jobs

Job Name

Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.

Every interactive solution will have a user assigned job name associated with it. This provides a record of applied loads, enforced motion boundary conditions, solution frequencies requested, structural damping definition, and output request entities. In a Nastran sense, each job represents a “loading condition” which reflects application of a number of loads and load types distributed on the structure. Maintaining a record of the interactive run provides a starting point for subsequent analyses whether they are done in the current session, or a subsequent session. Specifically, if a user wanted to change only a frequency dependent load function or damping function, the interactive job storage capacity makes this a simple procedure.

Each Interactive Analysis will have its solution specifications stored with a job name (Interactive Name). This allows recovery of all specifications required for performing that particular analysis : loading, damping, solution frequencies, and output entities. If an existing Interactive Job is selected, those input requirements automatically populate the interactive menus. If we want to rerun that analysis, all that is required is to hit APPLY on the Analysis Menu. When the calculations are finished in Nastran, the interactive system automatically positions the user in the Interactive Results section where XY plot requests can be made. Plot requests are not saved in the jobs data.

Select Modal Results .DBALLThe following form appears when you select Select Nastran .DBALL from the Analysis form. This form provides the pointer to the Nastran database which contains the preconditioned normal modes solution. Some additional data is retrieved from this database for use in MSC.Patran. Specifically, the Nastran modal constraint data is provided to MSC.Patran to guarantee that the allowable degrees of freedom available for enforced motion are exposed in the Loading Menu. (Application of enforced motion in modal frequency response requires that the effected degrees of freedom were constrained in the normal modes analysis.)

Select Modal Results .DBALL

OK Filter Cancel

Job Filter

Selected Results File

Directory DBALL Files

/oivory/hotline/.

/oivory/hotline/..

/oivory/hotlin/AA_sessions

/oakland/users/oivory/hotline/*.DBALL

aaa.DBALL


Loading FormThis form allows you to create loading sets. The following is the default form.

The following shows the Loading Form filled out with a few different load conditions.

If Load Type = Acoustic, Load Entity can only reference elements and the default direction for the load application is relative to the element normal regardless of the Coord Frame selection. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the element was defined in a local coordinate system, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame column. If the user changes the Direction from NORMAL to a specific direction vector, then the applied pressure direction is relative to the Coord Frame referenced.

If Load Type = Force, Load Entity can only reference nodes (grid points), and a direction vector is input to define application direction relative to the coordinate frame reference. If no coordinate reference frame is specified, the default becomes the Basic Coordinate system (Coord 0).

If Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, Load Entity can only be selected from nodes that will appear in the Load Entities list box. These nodes represent the set of all possible nodes to which enforced motion can be applied, and is limited to nodes that were constrained

Loading Form

Select Damping Field

No DampingCreate New Field/Table...

Damping (w): Select Damping Field

Add Load Clear All Delete Load

OK Defaults Cancel

3

5

4

2

1

7

6

Load Type

Accelerati>

Load Var.(w) Amplitude Load Entities Direction Coord Frame

Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.

No Damping

during the normal modes analysis. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the node was defined in a local coordinate frame, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame column.

When Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, and a specific node has been selected in Load Entities, the Direction specification will indicate which directions are available X, Y, and / or Z in the reference coordinate frame. When an enforced motion is defined for a selected degree of freedom, it is eliminated from the available enforced motion set. Only one enforced motion boundary condition per degree of freedom can be applied to a given node. (Enforced motion cannot be applied to rotational degrees of freedom for interactive analysis).

Loading Form

Auto Load Selection

Element Faces to Load

Damping (w): Select Damping Field

Add Load Clear All Delete Load

OK Defaults Cancel

3

5

4

2

1

7

6

Load Type

Accelerati>

Load Var.(w) Amplitude Load Entities Direction Coord Frame

Velocity

Displaceme>

Force

Acoustic 2D

Acoustic 3D

Displaceme>

Linearly_I>

Constant_A>

Owens_Rand>

Linearly_I>

Owens_Rand>

Constant_A>

Linearly_I>

4.

1.

6.

1.

10.

1.

1.

Node 5, 15

Node 115

Node 15

node 1 6

Element 4

Node 5

Z

Z

Y

< 1 1 0 >

Normal

Normal

X

Coord 0

Coord 1

Coord 0

Coord 0

N/A

N/A

Coord 0

Linearly_Increasing


Create a Field FormThis form appears when you select the Create New Field/Table... button from the Loading Form.

Create A Field

Load Data From Field...

Field Name:

Input Data:


Apply Close

3

5

4

2

1

7

9

8

6

Frequency Value

10

Output Selection FormThis form will allow the user to select nodes and elements for output, and allow him to select the frequencies which interest him in the analysis. The frequency selection form is the same form that is used in standard analysis for sol 111 subcase parameters.

Output Selection

Define Frequencies...

Grids for Output

Elements for Output

Real/Imag

Mag/Phase

OK Cancel

◆

◆◆

Define Frequencies prompts a spreadsheet for defining the desired solution frequencies for which output will be available. Output Selection also provides for selecting Nodes / Grids and Elements for which output response is desired. Selection can be made to create output response for complex quantities in either Real / Imaginary or Magnitude / Phase formats. For Interactive Analysis, the output quantities are preset. Close the Output Selection menu.


Define Frequencies FormThis form allows the user to define the frequencies of interest in the most complete way. This form allows the users access to FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5.

Define Frequencies

Input Data 0.Type: Linear


OK Defaults Cancel

3

5

4

2

1

7

6

Incr. Type

Linear

Start Freq. End Freq. No Incr. Cluster/Spread


CHAPTER

4 Read Results

■ Overview of Reading Results

■ Read Output2

■ Attach XDB

■ Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities

■ Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities

4.1 Overview of Reading ResultsThe Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen.

There are currently two actions that allow for importation of results. Read Output2 as the Action on the Analysis form allows the model and⁄or results data to be read into the MSC.Patran database from an MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file. Subordinate forms of the Analysis form will define translation parameters, which control the data to be translated, and the OUTPUT2 file from which to translate. These forms are described on the following pages. OUTPUT2 files are created by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 card in the MSC.Nastran bulk data.

Attach XDB as the Action on the Analysis form allows the results data from a MSC.Access database (an .xdb file) to be accessed. In this case the results are not read directly into the MSC.Patran database but instead remain in the MSC.Access database. Only what is termed as meta data is read into the MSC.Patran database. Meta data consists of only the Result Case names, their associated subcases, primary and secondary result types, global variables and the file location of the MSC.Access database or .xdb file. The Meta data is used to translate results on the fly when the user attempts to postprocess the model. Subordinate forms of the Analysis form will define translation parameters which control the data to be accessed on attachment. These forms are also described on the following pages. MSC.Access databases are created by placing a PARAM,POST,0 card in the MSC.Nastran bulk data.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

2CHAPTER 4Read Results

4.2 Read Output2This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Output2, as the selected Action, defines the type of data to be read from the analysis code results file into MSC.Patran. The Object choices are: Result Entities, Model Data, or Both.

When the Object selected is Result Entities, the model data must already exist in the database. No results can be read into MSC.Patran if the associated node or element does not already exist. Model Data only reads the model data that exists in the results file. Both will first read the model data, then the result entities. If Model Data or Both are selected, it is up to the user to ensure that there will not be any ID conflicts with existing model entities.

Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name used for the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results menu. This will allow MSC.Patran to load the results directly into the load cases that were used for the analysis.

Defines the results file to be read. The form that is called up lists all files recognized as being analysis code results files. By default this is all files with an op2 extension on them. This can be changed with the filter.

Defines how far the results translation will proceed. If Translate is selected, a job file containing information for the results translation control is created, and then submitted for translation. If Control File is selected, the procedure will stop as soon as the control file is generated.

Defines any parameters used to control the results or model translation from the analysis code results file.

Results File Formats. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface supports several different OUTPUT2 file formats. The interface, running on any platform can read a binary format OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC ⁄Nastran running on any of these same platforms. For example, a binary OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC.Nastran running on an IBM RS/6000 can be read by MSC.Patran running on DEC Alpha. MSC.Patran may be able to read binary format OUTPUT2 files from other platforms if they contain 32 bit, IEEE format entities (either Big or Little Indian).

For platforms that do not produce OUTPUT2 files in these formats, MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran can read OUTPUT2 files created with the FORM=FORMATTED option in MSC.Nastran. This option can be selected from the Analysis/Translation Parameters form in MSC.Patran and directs MSC.Nastran to produce an ASCII format OUTPUT2 file that can be moved between any platforms. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface detects this format when the OUTPUT2 file is opened, automatically converts it to the binary format, and then reads the model and/or results into the MSC.Patran database.

An OUTPUT2 file is created by MSC.Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the bulk data portion of the input deck. The formatted or unformatted OUTPUT2 file is specified in the FMS section using an ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = filename, UNIT=#, FORM=FORMATTED (or UNFORMATTED). See Translation Parameters (p. 176).


Translation Parameters (OUTPUT2). This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object. When reading results there are three Object options that may be selected: Result Entities, Model Data or Both. This form affects import of all these objects as noted below.


MSC.Nastran

Result Entities


1.0E-8Division:

1.0E-4Numerical:

Tolerances

68MSC.Nastran Version:

Rotational Nodal Results

Stress⁄Strain Invariants

Principal Directions

Nodal Element Results Positions:

Additional Results to be Imported

OK Defaults Cancel

P-element P-order Field

Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only these tolerances are available.

Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during translation. Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation.

If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter will indicate which results are to be included in the translation.

Specification of which version of MSC.Nastran created the OUTPUT2 file to be read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified.

Create a field that describes the polynomial orders in all p-elements in the model at the end of an adaptive cycle.

4.3 Attach XDBThis form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu and Attach XDB is the selected Action, which defines the type of data to be read from the analysis code results file into MSC.Patran.

Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name used for the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results menu. This will allow MSC.Patran to load the results directly into the load cases that were used for the analysis.

Defines the results file to be read. This is the MSC.Access database (or .xdb file). The form that is called up lists all files recognized as being analysis code results files. By default, all files with an xdb extension are listed on them. This can be changed with the filter. One may attach up to 20 .xdb files simultaneously.

The Method can currently only be set to Local. This means that the MSC.Access database exists locally, or via NFS, somewhere on the machine that MSC.Patran is running on.

Defines the parameters used to control Model and Results Translation. This form enables you to select which Superelements are to be imported into MSC.Patran. You can also select a Model Design Cycle cycle/iteration when importing an XDB file with Shape optimization results.

Three selections under Object are possible: Results Entities, Model Data and Both. When Results Entities is selected, it is assumed that the model data already exists in the MSC.Patran database. Only metadata or catalog information such as Result Cases/Types, Global Variables, and file connection is read into the MSC.Patran database. The results data remains in the XDB file. The Model Data selection only imports Nodes, Elements, and Coordinate Systems. In addition, if the model has Superelements, separate groups are created for each Superelement. The Both selection, imports the Model Data and then attaches the Results Entities.


Results File Formats. The same basic issues exist for MSC.Access databases as for OUTPUT2 files. For example, the MSC.Access database (xdb file) may be exchanged between computer Systems that have binary compatibility. That is, an XDB file generated on a SUN Machine may be used on an IBM/AIX, HPUX or SGI computers.

However, in order to exchange the XDB file on binary incompatible machines, one needs to use the TRANS and RECEIVE utilities delivered with every installation of MSC.Nastran.

TRANS converts an XDB file generated by MSC.Nastran to an “equivalent” character, i.e. ASCII, file which can be transported to another computer across the network via ftp or rcp. RECEIVE converts the character file back into the XDB format for postprocessing.

For more information on TRANS and RECEIVE utilities, please consult the “Configuration and Operations Guide” for V70 of MSC.Nastran.

A MSC.Access XDB database is created by MSC.Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,0 in the bulk data portion of the input deck. See Translation Parameters (p. 176).

In this release of the product, it is assumed that the Geometry, loads and results ouput all reside in the same physical XDB file. That is, "split" XDB databases are not supported.

Translation Parameters (XDB). This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object.

Translation ParametersMSC.NastranBothTranslation Parameters

Tolerances

Division: 1.0E-8

Numerical: 1.0E-4

Additional Results to be Accessed

Rotational Nodal Results

Stress/Strain Invariants

Principal Directions

Element Results Positions: Nodal

Model Design Cycle

Design Iteration

012

Superelement Filter

Superelement ID(s)

01020

Superelement Prefix: Superelement

OK Defaults Cancel

Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when comparing real values for equality.

Select which Model Design Cycle to use for the optimized shape you are importing. The default is to import the model based on the last design iteration. This form will only appear if the XDB file contains results of an Optimization run i.e., SOL200.

Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during translation. Rotational Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation.

With the Superelement filter you can select any given Superelement to be imported into the MSC.Patran database. The default is to import All Superelements. This form will only appear if the specified XDB file contains Superelements.

Superelement Prefix controls the group names created for each Superelement. For example if you specify "SE" as a prefix, the group name created in MSC.Patran for Superelement 10 will be "SE 10".

Create Groups By PIDs

Model Import Options

This option creates Groups based on Element Properties found in the XDB. For example, if XDB contains CQUAD4 elements with the PSHELL ID of 4536 then MSC.Patran will create a group named “PSHELL 4536” containing the CQUAD4 elements and the nodes connecting the elements.


4.4 Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model QuantitiesThe following table indicates all the possible results quantities that can be loaded into the MSC.Patran database during results translation from MSC.Nastran. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor, and determines which postprocessing techniques are available to view the results quantity. Data Block indicates which MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 data block the data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the results quantity, such as if it is only for certain element types, and what Output Request selection will generate this data block. For design optimization, all of the listed results can be loaded as a function of design cycle.

Results.

Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description

Bar Forces Rotational Vector OEF1 Bar moments

Translational Vector OEF1 Bar forces

Warping Torque Scalar OEF1 Warping torque

Bar Strains Axial Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Axial safety margin

Compression Safety Margin

Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in compression

Maximum Axial Scalar OSTR1 Maximum axial strain

Minimum Axial Scalar OSTR1 Minimum axial strain

Tension Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in tension

Torsional Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in torsion

Bar Stresses Axial Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Axial safety margin

Compression Safety Margin

Scalar OES1 Safety margin in compression

Maximum Axial Scalar OES1 Maximum axial stress

Minimum Axial Scalar OES1 Minimum axial stress

Tension Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in tension

Torsional Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in torsion

Grid Point Stresses

Stress Tensor Tensor OGS1 Stress tensor

Zero Shear Angle Scalar OGS1 Zero shear angle

Major Principal Scalar OGS1 Major principal

Minor Principal Scalar OGS1 Minor principal

Maximum Shear Scalar OGS1 Maximum shear

von Mises Scalar OGS1 von mises

Gap Results Displacement Vector OEF1 or OES1

Gap element displacement

Force Vector OEF1 or OES1

Gap element force

Slip Vector OEF1 or OES1

Gap element slip

Nonlinear Strains Creep Strain Scalar OESNL1 Creep strain

Plastic Strain Scalar OESNL1 Plastic strain

Strain Tensor Tensor OESNL1 Strain tensor

Nonlinear Stresses

Equivalent Stress Scalar OESNL1 Equivalent stress

Stress Tensor Tensor OESNL1 Stress tensor

Principal Strain Direction

1st Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal x cosine

1st Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal y cosine

1st Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal z cosine

2nd Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal x cosine

2nd Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal y cosine

2nd Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal z cosine

3rd Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal x cosine

3rd Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal y cosine

3rd Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal z cosine

Zero Shear Angle Scalar OSTR1 Zero shear angle

Principal Stress Direction

1st Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal x cosine

1st Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal y cosine

1st Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal z cosine

2nd Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal x cosine

2nd Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal y cosine

2nd Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal z cosine

3rd Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal x cosine

3rd Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal y cosine

3rd Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal z cosine

Zero Shear Angle Scalar OES1 Zero shear angle



Shear Panel Forces

Force12 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 1 to 2








Kick Scalar OEF1 Kick forces

Rotational Vector OEF1 Moments at nodes

Shear Scalar OEF1 Shear force in panel

Translational Vector OEF1 Forces at nodes

Shear Panel Strains

Average Shear Scalar OSTR1 Average shear strain in panel

Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Maximum shear strain in panel

Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Shear safety margin of panel

Shear Panel Stresses

Average Shear Scalar OES1 Average shear stress in panel

Maximum Shear Scalar OES1 Maximum shear stress in panel

Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Shear safety margin of panel

Shell Forces Force Resultant Tensor OEF1 Force resultants and moment resultants

Moment Resultant Tensor OEF1 Moment stress resultants

Strain Curvatures Strain Tensor Tensor OSTR1 Strain curvatures of a plate

1st Principal Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of strain 1st principal

2nd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of strain 2nd principal

Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of maximum shear strain

von Mises Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of von Mises strain

Zero Shear Angle Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of zero shear angle

Strain Energy Energy Scalar ONRGY1 Element’s total strain energy

Energy Density Scalar ONRGY1 Element’s strain energy density

Percent of Total Scalar ONRGY1 Element’s percentage of total strain density


Strain Invariants 1st Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 1st principal

2nd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 2nd principal

3rd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 3rd principal

Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Maximum shear strain

Mean Pressure Scalar OSTR1 Mean strain pressure

Octahedral Shear Scalar OSTR1 Octahedral shear strain

von Mises Scalar OSTR1 von Mises equivalent strain

Strain Tensor NONE Tensor OSTR1 Strain tensor

Stress Invariants 1st Principal Scalar OES1 Stress 1st Principal

2nd Principal Scalar OES1 Stress 2nd Principal

3rd Principal Scalar OES1 Strain 3rd Principal

Maximum Shear Scalar OES1 Maximum shear stress

Mean Pressure Scalar OES1 Mean stress principal

Octahedral Shear Scalar OES1 Octahedral shear stress

von Mises Scalar OES1 von Mises equivalent stress

Stress Tensor NONE Tensor OES1 Stress tensor

Accelerations Rotational Vector OUGV1 Nodal angular accelerations

Translational Vector OUGV1 Nodal translational accelerations

Applied Loads Rotational Vector OPG1 Nodal equivalent applied moments

Translational Vector OPG1 Nodal equivalent applied forces

Constraint Forces Rotational Vector OQG1 Nodal moments of single-point constraints

Translational Vector OQG1 Nodal forces of single-point constraint

Displacements Rotational Vector OUGV1 Nodal rotational displacements

Translational Vector OUGV1 Nodal translational displacements

Eigenvectors Rotational Vector OPHIG Nodal rotational eigenvectors

Translational Vector OPHIG Nodal translational eigenvectors

Nonlinear Applied Loads

Rotational Vector OPNL1 Nodal nonlinear applied moments



Translational Vector OPNL1 Nodal nonlinear applied forces

Velocities Rotational Vector OUGV1 Nodal angular velocity

Translational Vector OUGV1 Nodal translational velocity

Error Estimate Scalar ERROR Elemental error in adaptive analysis

Grid Point Forces Elements Vector OGPFB1* Internal nodal force contribution by element

Applied Loads Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent applied forces

Constraint Forces Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent constraint forces

Total Vector OGPFB1* Total nodal equivalent forces due to internal loads, applied loads and constraint forces.

Grid Point Moments

Elements Vector OGPFB1* Internal nodal moment contribution by element

Applied Loads Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent applied moments

Constraint Forces Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent constraint moments

Total Vector OGPFB1* Total nodal equivalent moments due to internal loads, applied loads and constraint forces.

Shape Change None Vector GEOMIN In a shape optimization run, this is the new shape displayed as a deformation of the original shape.


Global Variables. In addition to standard results quantities, a number of Global Variables can be created. This table outlines Global Variables that may be created. Global Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of the entire model.

Active Constraints

Element Stress Scalar R1TABRG Element stress

Element Strain Scalar R1TABRG Element strain

Element Force Scalar R1TABRG Element force

Element Ply Failure Scalar R1TABRG Element ply failure

Translational Displacement

Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational displacement

Rotational Displacement Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational displacement

Translational Velocity Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational velocity

Rotational Velocity Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational velocity

Translational Acceleration

Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational acceleration

Rotational Acceleration Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational acceleration

Translational SPC Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational SPC force

Rotational SPC Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational SPC force


Labels Type DataBlocks Description

Critical Load Factor S Oxxx Value of buckling load for the given buckling mode.

Time S Oxxx Time value of the time step.

Frequency S Oxxx Frequency value of the frequency step or for the normal mode.

Damping Ratio S Oxxx Damping ratio value of a complex eigenvalue analysis.

Eigenvalue S Oxxx Eigenvalue for normal modes or complex eigenvalue analysis.

Percent of Load S Oxxx Percent of load value for a nonlinear static analysis.

Adaptive Cycle S Oxxx Cycle number in p-adaptive analysis.

Design Cycle S Oxxx Cycle number in an optimization run (SOL 200).

Design Variable S DESTABHISADD

Design Variable for optimization (Label from DESTAB, value from HISADD).

Maximum Constraint Value

S HISADD Maximum constraint value for optimization.

Objective Function S HISADD Objective function for optimization.


Coordinate Systems. In some cases, the elemental stresses and strains are transformed from one coordinate frame to another when imported into the MSC.Patran database. The following describes the coordinate systems for these element results after they are imported into the MSC.Patran database. The coordinate system names referred to are described in the MSC.Patran or the MSC.Nastran documentation.

Projected Global System. The projected system is defined as follows. First, the normal to the shell surface is calculated. This varies for curved elements and is constant for flat elements. If the angle between the normal and the global x-axis is greater than .01 radians, the global x-axis is projected onto the shell surface as the local x-axis. If the angle is less than .01 radians, either the global y-axis or the z-axis (whichever makes the largest angle with the normal) is defined to be the local x-axis. The local y-axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by the normal and the local x-axis.

XY Plots. For results from MSC.Nastran design optimization solution 200 runs, three XY Plots are generated, but not posted, when the Read OUTPUT2 option is selected:

1. Objective Function vs. Design Cycle.

2. Maximum Constraint Value vs. Design Cycle.

3. Design Variable vs. Design Cycle.

These plots can be viewed under the XY Plot option in MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 7: XY Plotting. When they are initially posted, you will have to expand their windows to view them properly.

CTRIA3 Results are in the MSC.Nastran system which coincides with the MSC.Patran IJK system. At the user’s request during postprocessing, these results can be transformed by MSC.Patran to alternate coordinate systems. If the user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projected Global System).

CQUAD4 Results are in the MSC.Nastran “bisector” coordinate system but may be transformed by MSC.Patran to alternate coordinate systems (e.g., global) during postprocessing. If the user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projected Global System). Import of results when this element is used in a hyperelastic analysis is not currently supported.

CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA

The user can request that MSC.Nastran compute element results in either a local element or alternate coordinate system via the PSOLID entry. If the element results are in the local element system, these are converted to the MSC.Patran IJK system on import. If the results are in a system other than local element, they are imported in this system. These results may be transformed to alternate systems during postprocessing.

CQUAD8, CTRI6

The elemental coordinate system, used by MSC.Nastran for results, is described in the MSC.Nastran documentation. These results are imported into the MSC.Patran database “as-is”. These results can be postprocessed in MSC.Patran using the “As Is” options, but they cannot be transformed to alternate coordinate systems.

Model Data. The following table outlines all the data that will be created in the MSC.Patran database when reading model data from an MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file and the location in the OUTPUT2 file from where it is derived. This is the only data extracted from the OUTPUT2 file. This data should be sufficient for evaluating results values.

Item Block Description

Nodes GEOM1 Node IDNodal CoordinatesReference Coordinate FrameAnalysis Coordinate Frame

Coordinate Frames GEOM1 Coordinate Frame IDTransformation MatrixOriginCan be Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical

Elements GEOM2 Element IDTopology (e.g., Quad/4 or Hex20)Nodal Connectivity


4.5 Supported MSC.Access Result QuantitiesThe following tables list the currently supported quantities from the MSC.Access database (xdb file).To get further information on the MSC.Access, i.e. XDB, objects supported in MSC.Patran, please use the ddlprt and ddlqry utilities delivered with every installation of MSC.Nastran.

ddlprt is MSC.Access' on-line documentation.

ddlqry is MSC.Access’ Data Definition Language (DDL) browser.

See “Configuration and Operations Guide” for MSC.Nastran V70.

Nodal Results.

Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects

Displacements Translational VECTOR DISPR

Rotational VECTOR DISPR

Translational VECTOR DISPRI

Rotational VECTOR DISPRI

Translational VECTOR DISPMP

Rotational VECTOR DISPMP

Eigenvectors Translational VECTOR DISPR

Rotational VECTOR DISPR

Translational VECTOR DISPRI

Rotational VECTOR DISPRI

Translational VECTOR DISPMP

Rotational VECTOR DISPMP

Velocities Translational VECTOR VELOR

Rotational VECTOR VELOR

Translational VECTOR VELORI

Rotational VECTOR VELORI

Translational VECTOR VELOMP

Rotational VECTOR VELOMP

Accelerations Translational VECTOR ACCER

Rotational VECTOR ACCER

Translational VECTOR ACCERI

Rotational VECTOR ACCERI

Translational VECTOR ACCEMP

Rotational VECTOR ACCEMP

Constraint Forces Translational VECTOR SPCFR

Rotational VECTOR SPCFR

Translational VECTOR SPCFRI

Rotational VECTOR SPCFRI

Translational VECTOR SPCFMP

Rotational VECTOR SPCFMP

Applied Loads Translational VECTOR LOADR

Rotational VECTOR LOADR

Translational VECTOR LOADRI

Rotational VECTOR LOADRI

Translational VECTOR LOADMP

Rotational VECTOR LOADMP

Grid Point Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR SGSVR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SGSVR

Major Principal SCALAR SGSVR

Minor Principal SCALAR SGSVR

Maximum Shear SCALAR SGSVR

Von Mises SCALAR SGSVR



Grid Point Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR SGVVR

Mean Pressure SCALAR SGVVR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR SGVVR

Major Principal SCALAR SGVVR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR SGVVR

Minor Principal SCALAR SGSVR

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR

Grid Point Strains Strain Tensor TENSOR EGSVR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EGSVR

Major Principal SCALAR EGSVR

Minor Principal SCALAR EGSVR

Maximum Shear SCALAR EGSVR

Von Mises SCALAR EGSVR


Grid Point Strains Strain Tensor TENSOR EGVVR

Mean Pressure SCALAR EGVVR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR EGVVR

Major Principal SCALAR EGVVR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR EGVVR

Minor Principal SCALAR EGSVR

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR

GPS discontinunities Stress Tensor TENSOR SGSDTR

Major Principal SCALAR SGSDTR

Minor Principal SCALAR SGSDTR

Maximum Shear SCALAR SGSDTR

Von Mises SCALAR SGSDTR

Error Estimate SCALAR SGSDTR

Stresss Tensor TENSOR SGVDTR

Mean Pressure SCALAR SGVDTR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR SGVDTR

Major Principal SCALAR SGVDTR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR SGVDTR

Minor Principal SCALAR SGVDTR

Error Estimate Direct SCALAR SGVDTR

Error Estimate Principal

SCALAR SGVDTR



Elem Stress discontinunities

Stress Tensor TENSOR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR

Major Principal SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR

Minor Principal SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR

Maximum Shear SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR

Von Mises SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR

Error Estimate SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR

Stresss Tensor TENSOR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Mean Pressure SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Major Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Minor Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Error Estimate Direct SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR

Error Estimate Principal

SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR


MPC Constraint Forces Translational VECTOR MPCFR, MPCFRI, MPCFMP

Rotational VECTOR MPCFR, MPCFRI, MPCFMP

Grid Point Forces Applied Loads VECTOR GPFV

Constraint Forces VECTOR GPFV

MPC Forces VECTOR GPFV

Elements VECTOR GPFV

Total VECTOR GPFV

Grid Point Moments Applied Loads VECTOR GPFV

Constraint Forces VECTOR GPFV

MPC Forces VECTOR GPFV

Elements VECTOR GPFV

Total VECTOR GPFV

Bushing Forces Translational,Rotational

VECTOR FBSHR, FBSHRI, FBSHMP

Bushing Stresses Translational,Rotational

VECTOR SBSHR, SBSHRI, SBSHMP

Bushing Strains Translational,Rotational

VECTOR EBSHR, EBSHRI, EBSHMP

Bushing 1-D Results Axial Stress, Axial Strain, Axial Force, Axial Displacement

SCALAR SBS1R, SBS1RI, SBS1MP

Nonlinear Bushing Force Axial Stress, Axial Strain, Axial Force, Axial Displacement

SCALAR NBS1R, NBS1RI, NBS1MP

Temperature SCALAR THERR

Enthalpies SCALAR ENTHR

Rates of Enthalpy Change SCALAR ENRCR

Constraint Heats SCALAR HTFFR

Applied Loads SCALAR HTFLR



Boundary Heat Flux Applied Loads SCALAR QHBDY

Free Convection SCALAR QHBDY

Forced Convection SCALAR QHBDY

Radiation SCALAR QHBDY

Total SCALAR QHBDY

Heat Fluxes VECTOR QBARR, QBEMR,QCONR, QHEXR,QPENR, QQD4R, QQD8R, QRODR, QTETR, QTUBR, QTX6R

Temperature Gradients VECTOR QBARR, QBEMR, QCONR, QHEXR,QPENR, QQD4R, QQD8R, QRODR, QTETR, QTUBR, QTX6R


Elemental Results.


Bar Forces Translational VECTOR FBEMR

Rotational VECTOR FBEMR

Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMR

Translational VECTOR FBEMRI

Rotational VECTOR FBEMRI

Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMRI

Translational VECTOR FBEMMP

Rotational VECTOR FBEMMP

Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMMP

Translational VECTOR FTUBR

Rotational VECTOR FTUBR

Translational VECTOR FTUBRI

Rotational VECTOR FTUBRI

Translational VECTOR FTUBMP

Rotational VECTOR FTUBMP

Translational VECTOR FCONR

Rotational VECTOR FCONR

Translational VECTOR FCONRI

Rotational VECTOR FCONRI

Translational VECTOR FCONMP

Rotational VECTOR FCONMP

Translational VECTORs FELSR

FELSRI

FELSMP

FDMPR

FDMPRI

FDMPMP

Rotational VECTOR FBARR

Translational VECTOR FBARR

Rotational VECTOR FBARRI

Translational VECTOR FBARRI


Bar Forces (continued Rotational VECTOR FBARMP

Translational VECTOR FBARMP

Translational VECTOR FBRXR

Rotational VECTOR FBRXR

Shear Panel Forces Force41 SCALAR FSHRR

Force21 SCALAR FSHRR







Kick SCALAR FSHRR

Shear SCALAR FSHRR

Force41 SCALAR FSHRRI








Kick SCALAR FSHRRI

Shear SCALAR FSHRRI

Force41 SCALAR FSHRMP









Shear Panel Forces(continued)

Kick SCALAR FSHRMP

Shear SCALAR FSHRMP

Shell Forces Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4R

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4R

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4RI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4RI

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4MP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4MP

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8R

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8R

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8RI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8RI

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8MP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8MP

Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRR

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRR

Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRRI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRRI

Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRMP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRMP

Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3R

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3R

Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3RI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3RI

Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3MP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3MP

Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6R

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6R

Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6RI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6RI

Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6MP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6MP



Shell Forces (continued) Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRR

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRR

Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRRI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRRI

Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRMP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRMP

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XR

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XR

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XRI

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XRI

Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XMP

Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XMP

Gap Results Force VECTOR FGAPR

Displacement VECTOR FGAPR

Slip VECTOR FGAPR

Force VECTOR NGAPR

Displacement VECTOR NGAPR

Slip VECTOR NGAPR

Stress Tensor NONE TENSOR SRODR

TENSOR SRODRI

TENSOR SRODMP

TENSOR SBEMR

NONE TENSOR SBEMRI

TENSOR SBEMMP

NONE TENSOR STUBR

TENSOR STUBRI

TENSOR STUBMP

NONE TENSOR SCONR

TENSOR SCONRI

TENSOR SCONMP


Stress Tensor (continued) NONE TENSOR SELSR

TENSOR SELSRI

TENSOR SELSMP

NONE TENSOR SQD4R

TENSOR SQD4RI

TENSOR SQD4MP

NONE TENSOR SBARR

TENSOR SBARRI

TENSOR SBARMP

NONE TENSOR STETR

TENSOR STETRI

TENSOR STETMP

NONE TENSOR STX6R

NONE TENSOR SQD8R

TENSOR SQD8RI

TENSOR SQD8MP

NONE TENSOR SHEXR

TENSOR SHEXRI

TENSOR SHEXMP

NONE TENSOR SPENR

TENSOR SPENRI

TENSOR SPENMP

NONE TENSOR STRRR

TENSOR STRRRI

TENSOR STRRMP

NONE TENSOR STR6R

TENSOR STR6RI

TENSOR STR6MP

NONE TENSOR STR3R

TENSOR STR3RI

TENSOR STR3MP



Stress Tensor (continued) NONE TENSOR SQDRR

TENSOR SQDRRI

TENSOR SQDRMP

NONE TENSOR TQD4R

NONE TENSOR TQD8R

NONE TENSOR TTR3R

NONE TENSOR TTR6R

NONE TENSOR SBRXR

NONE TENSOR SQD4XR

TENSOR SQD4XRI

TENSOR SQD4XMP

NONE TENSOR SBRXR

Bar Stresses Maximum Axial SCALAR SBEMR

Minimum Axial SCALAR SBEMR

Maximum Axial SCALAR SBARR

Minimum Axial SCALAR SBARR

Tension Safety Margin SCALAR SBARR

Maximum Axial SCALAR SBRXR

Minimum Axial SCALAR SBRXR

Maximum Axial SCALAR SBRXR

Minimum Axial SCALAR SBRXR

Bar Strains Maximum Axial SCALAR EBEMR

Minimum Axial SCALAR EBEMR

Maximum Axial SCALAR EBARR

Minimum Axial SCALAR EBARR

Tension Safety Margin SCALAR EBARR

Compressive Safety Margin

SCALAR EBARR

Maximum Axial SCALAR EBRXR

Minimum Axial SCALAR EBRXR

Maximum Axial SCALAR EBRXR

Minimum Axial SCALAR EBRXR


Strain Tensor NONE ENG_TENSORENG_TENSORENG_TENSORENG_TENSORENG_TENSORENG_TENSOR

ERODRERODRIERODMPEBEMREBEMRIEBEMMP

NONE ENG_TENSORENG_TENSORENG_TENSOR

ETUBRETUBRIETUBMP


ECONRECONRIECONMP


EELSREELSRIEELSMP


EQD4REQD4RIEQD4MP


EBARRIEBARREBARMP


ETETRETETRIETETMP


EQD8REQD8RIEQD8MP


EHEXREHEXRIEHEXMP


EPENREPENRIEPENMP


ETRRRETRRRIETRRMP


ETR6RETR6RIETR6MP


ETR3RETR3RIETR3MP



Strain Tensor (continued) NONE ENG_TENSORENG_TENSORENG_TENSOR

EQDRREQDRRIEQDRMP

NONE ENG_TENSOR GQD4R

NONE ENG_TENSOR GQD8R

NONE ENG_TENSOR GTR3R

NONE ENG_TENSOR GTR6R

NONE ENG_TENSOR EBRXR


EQD4XREQD4XRIEQD4XMP

NONE ENG_TENSOR EBRXR

Shear Panel Stresses Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRR

Average Shear SCALAR SSHRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRRI

Average Shear SCALAR SSHRRI

Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRMP

Average Shear SCALAR SSHRMP

Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRR

Average Shear SCALAR SSHRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRRI

Average Shear SCALAR SSHRRI

Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRMP

Average Shear SCALAR SSHRMP

Shear Panel Strains Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRR

Average Shear SCALAR ESHRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRRI

Average Shear SCALAR ESHRRI

Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRMP

Average Shear SCALAR ESHRMP


Principal Stress Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD4R

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD8R

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STRRR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STR6R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STR3R



Principal Stress Direction (continued)

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQDRR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TQD4R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TQD8R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TTR3R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TTR6R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD4XR

Stress Invariants Major Principal SCALAR SQD4R

Minor Principal SCALAR SQD4R

Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD4R

Major Principal SCALAR STETR

Mean Pressure SCALAR STETR

Minor Principal SCALAR STETR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR STETR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR STETR

Von Mises SCALAR STETR

Major Principal SCALAR STX6R

Maximum Shear SCALAR STX6R

Octahedral Shear SCALAR STX6R

Von Mises SCALAR STX6R

Major Principal SCALAR SQD8R

Minor Principal SCALAR SQD8R

Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD8R

Von Mises SCALAR SQD8R

Major Principal SCALAR SHEXR

Mean Pressure SCALAR SHEXR

Minor Principal SCALAR SHEXR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR SHEXR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR SHEXR

Von Mises SCALAR SHEXR

Major Principal SCALAR SPENR

Mean Pressure SCALAR SPENR

Minor Principal SCALAR SPENR


Stress Invariants (continued)

Intermediate Principal SCALAR SPENR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR SPENR

Von Mises SCALAR SPENR

Major Principal SCALAR STRRR

Minor Principal SCALAR STRRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR STRRR

Von Mises SCALAR STRRR

Major Principal SCALAR STR6R

Minor Principal SCALAR STR6R

Maximum Shear SCALAR STR6R

Von Mises SCALAR STR6R

Major Principal SCALAR STR3R

Minor Principal SCALAR STR3R

Maximum Shear SCALAR STR3R

Von Mises SCALAR STR3R

Major Principal SCALAR SQDRR

Minor Principal SCALAR SQDRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR SQDRR

Von Mises SCALAR SQDRR

Major Principal SCALAR TQD4R

Minor Principal SCALAR TQD4R

Maximum Shear SCALAR TQD4R

Major Principal SCALAR TQD8R

Minor Principal SCALAR TQD8R

Maximum Shear SCALAR TQD8R

Major Principal SCALAR TTR3R

Minor Principal SCALAR TTR3R

Maximum Shear SCALAR TTR3R

Major Principal SCALAR TTR6R

Minor Principal SCALAR TTR6R

Maximum Shear SCALAR TTR6R

Major Principal SCALAR SQD4XR



Stress Invariants (continued)

Minor Principal SCALAR SQD4XR

Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD4XR

Von Mises SCALAR SQD4XR

Principal Strain Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD4R

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD8R

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR

Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR

Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR

Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR

Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR

Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR

Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR

Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR

Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR

Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR


Principal Strain Direction(continued)

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETRRR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETR6R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETR3R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQDRR

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GQD4R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GQD8R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GTR3R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GTR6R

Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD4XR

Strain Invariants Major Principal SCALAR EQD4R

Minor Principal SCALAR EQD4R

Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD4R

Major Principal SCALAR ETETR

Mean Pressure SCALAR ETETR

Minor Principal SCALAR ETETR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR ETETR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR ETETR

Von Mises SCALAR ETETR

Major Principal SCALAR EQD8R

Minor Principal SCALAR EQD8R

Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD8R

Von Mises SCALAR EQD8R

Major Principal SCALAR EHEXR

Mean Pressure SCALAR EHEXR

Minor Principal SCALAR EHEXR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR EHEXR

Octahedral Shear SCALAR EHEXR

Von Mises SCALAR EHEXR

Major Principal SCALAR EPENR

Mean Pressure SCALAR EPENR

Minor Principal SCALAR EPENR

Intermediate Principal SCALAR EPENR



Strain Invariants(continued)

Octahedral Shear SCALAR EPENR

Von Mises SCALAR EPENR

Major Principal SCALAR ETRRR

Minor Principal SCALAR ETRRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR ETRRR

Von Mises SCALAR ETRRR

Major Principal SCALAR ETR6R

Minor Principal SCALAR ETR6R

Maximum Shear SCALAR ETR6R

Von Mises SCALAR ETR6R

Major Principal SCALAR ETR3R

Minor Principal SCALAR ETR3R

Maximum Shear SCALAR ETR3R

Von Mises SCALAR ETR3R

Major Principal SCALAR EQDRR

Minor Principal SCALAR EQDRR

Maximum Shear SCALAR EQDRR

Von Mises SCALAR EQDRR

Major Principal SCALAR GQD4R

Minor Principal SCALAR GQD4R

Maximum Shear SCALAR GQD4R

Major Principal SCALAR GQD8R

Minor Principal SCALAR GQD8R

Maximum Shear SCALAR GQD8R

Major Principal SCALAR GTR3R

Minor Principal SCALAR GTR3R

Maximum Shear SCALAR GTR3R

Major Principal SCALAR GTR6R

Minor Principal SCALAR GTR6R

Maximum Shear SCALAR GTR6R

Major Principal SCALAR EQD4XR

Minor Principal SCALAR EQD4XR


Strain Invariants(continued)

Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD4XR

Von Mises SCALAR EQD4XR

Nonlinear Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR NTETR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTETR

Stress Tensor TENSOR NTUBR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTUBR

Stress Tensor TENSOR NTR3R

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTR3R

Stress Tensor TENSOR NRODR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NRODR

Stress Tensor TENSOR NQD4R

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NQD4R

Stress Tensor TENSOR NPENR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NPENR

Stress Tensor TENSOR NCONR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NCONR

Stress Tensor TENSOR NHEXR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NHEXR

Stress Tensor TENSOR NBEMR

Equivalent Stress SCALAR NBEMR







Nonlinear Strains Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTETR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NTETR

Creep Strain SCALAR NTETR

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTUBR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NTUBR

Creep Strain SCALAR NTUBR



Nonlinear Strains (continued)

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTR3R

Plastic Strain SCALAR NTR3R

Creep Strain SCALAR NTR3R

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NRODR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NRODR

Creep Strain SCALAR NRODR

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NQD4R

Plastic Strain SCALAR NQD4R

Creep Strain SCALAR NQD4R

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NPENR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NPENR

Creep Strain SCALAR NPENR

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NCONR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NCONR

Creep Strain SCALAR NCONR

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NHEXR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NHEXR

Creep Strain SCALAR NHEXR

Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NBEMR

Plastic Strain SCALAR NBEMR

Creep Strain SCALAR NBEMR











Strain Energy Energy SCALAR URODR

Percent of Total SCALAR URODR

Energy Density SCALAR URODR

Energy SCALAR UBEMR

Percent of Total SCALAR UBEMR

Energy Density SCALAR UBEMR

Energy SCALAR UTUBR

Percent of Total SCALAR UTUBR

Energy Density SCALAR UTUBR

Energy SCALAR USHRR

Percent of Total SCALAR USHRR

Energy Density SCALAR USHRR

Energy SCALAR UCONR

Percent of Total SCALAR UCONR

Energy Density SCALAR UCONR

Energy SCALAR UELSR

Percent of Total SCALAR UELSR

Energy Density SCALAR UELSR

Energy SCALAR UDMPR

Percent of Total SCALAR UDMPR

Energy Density SCALAR UDMPR

Energy SCALAR UQD4R

Percent of Total SCALAR UQD4R

Energy Density SCALAR UQD4R

Energy SCALAR UBARR

Percent of Total SCALAR UBARR

Energy Density SCALAR UBARR

Energy SCALAR UGAPR

Percent of Total SCALAR UGAPR

Energy Density SCALAR UGAPR

Energy SCALAR UTETR

Percent of Total SCALAR UTETR



Strain Energy(continued)

Energy Density SCALAR UTETR

Energy SCALAR UTX6R

Percent of Total SCALAR UTX6R

Energy Density SCALAR UTX6R

Energy SCALAR UQD8R

Percent of Total SCALAR UQD8R

Energy Density SCALAR UQD8R

Energy SCALAR UHEXR

Percent of Total SCALAR UHEXR

Energy Density SCALAR UHEXR

Energy SCALAR UPENR

Percent of Total SCALAR UPENR

Energy Density SCALAR UPENR

Energy SCALAR UTRRR

Percent of Total SCALAR UTRRR

Energy Density SCALAR UTRRR

Energy SCALAR UTR3R

Percent of Total SCALAR UTR3R

Energy Density SCALAR UTR3R

Energy SCALAR UTR6R

Percent of Total SCALAR UTR6R

Energy Density SCALAR UTR6R

Energy SCALAR UQDRR

Percent of Total SCALAR UQDRR

Energy Density SCALAR UQDRR

Cauchy Stresses TENSOR HHEXR,HPENR,HQD4R,HQDXR.HQUDR,HTETR,HTR3R,HTR6R,HTRXR


Logarithmic Strains TENSOR HHEXR,HPENR,HQD4R,HQDXR.HQUDR,HTETR,HTR3R,HTR6R,HTRXR

Pressure TENSOR HHEXR,HPENR,HQD4R,HQDXR.HQUDR,HTETR,HTR3R,HTR6R,HTRXR

Volumetric Strains TENSOR HHEXR,HPENR,HQD4R,HQDXR.HQUDR,HTETR,HTR3R,HTR6R,HTRXR



CHAPTER

5 Read Input File

■ Review of Read Input File Form

■ Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File

■ Conflict Resolution

5.1 Review of Read Input File FormThe Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main menu, is chosen.

Read Input File as the selected Action on the Analysis form allows much of the model data from a NASTRAN input file to be translated into the MSC.Patran database. A subordinate File Selection form allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to translate. This form is described on the following pages.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

3CHAPTER 5Read Input File

Read Input File FormThis form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Input File, as the selected Action, specifies that model data is to be translated from the specified NASTRAN input file into the MSC.Patran database.

Analysis

Read Input File Action:

Model Data Object:

Translate Method:

Code:

Type:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Available Jobs

Job Name

simple

Job Description

Select Input File...

Apply

MSC.NASTRAN jobcreated on 30-Jan-93at 16:05:33

Entity Selection...


List of already existing jobs.

Name assigned to current translation job. This job name will be used as the base file name for the message file.

Activates a subordinate File Select form which allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to be translated.

Activates a subordinate Entity Selection form which allows the user to specify the specific card types to be read. Also defines ID offset values to be used during import.

Entity Selection FormThis subordinate form appears when the Entity Selection button is selected on the Analysis form and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MSC ⁄Nastran entity types to import.

Entity Selection

Entity Packets

Nodes Elements Material Properties Element Properties Coordinate Frames Load Sets Subcases MPC Data

Select None

Select All

Select All FEM

Select All LBC

Define Offsets...

Reset

OK Cancel

Highlighted entity types will be imported.

Activates the form to define ID offsets.


The following table shows the relation between the entity types listed above and the actual MSC ⁄Nastran card types effected. If an entity type is filtered out, it is treated as if those cards did not exist in the original input file.

It should be noted that since the GRID card is controlled with the Nodes filter, the grid.ps load set with the permanent single point constraint data will also be controlled by the Nodes filter.

Entity Type MSC.Nastran Cards

Nodes GRID, GRDSET, SPOINT

Elements BAROR, BEAMOR, CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CDAMP1, CDAMP2, CDAMP3, CDAMP4, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, CELAS4, CGAP, CHEXA, CMASS1, CMASS2, CMASS3, CMASS4, CONM1, CONM2, CONROD, CPENTA, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CROD, CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CTRIAX6, CTUBE, CVISC, PLOTEL

Material Properties

MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, MAT9

Element Properties

PBAR, PBCOMP, PBEAM, PBEND, PCOMP, PDAMP, PELAS, PGAP, PMASS, PROD, PSHEAR, PSHELL, PSOLID, PTUBE, PVISC

Coordinate Frames

CORD1C, CORD1R, CORD1S, CORD2C, CORD2R, CORD2S

Load Sets FORCE, GRAV,MOMENT, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, RFORCE, TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, SPC, SPC1, SPCD

Subcases LOAD, SPCADD, Case Control Section

MPC Data MPC, RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RROD, RSPLINE, RTRPLT

Define Offsets FormThis subordinate form appears when the Define Offsets button is selected on the Entity Selection form. It allows the user to specify the ID offsets used when reading a NASTRAN input file.

All references made in the input file will also be offset. If a node references a particular CID as its analysis frame, then the reference will be offset as well. If the coordinate frame is defined in the same input file, the proper references should be maintained. The preference will be properly maintained. If the coordinate frame existed in the file prior to the import, then it needs to be the offset CID. If a coordinate frame with that CID is not found in the database, an error message will be issued.

To determine which offset effects a particular MSC ⁄Nastran card type, refer to the table in the previous section.

For MSC.Patran entities identified by integer IDs (nodes, elements, coordinate frames, and MPCs), the offset value is simply added to the MSC ⁄Nastran ID to generate the MSC.Patran ID.

For MSC.Patran entities identified by text names (materials, element properties, load sets, and load cases), the offset value is first added to the MSC ⁄Nastran ID. The new integer value is then used to generate the MSC.Patran name per the naming conventions described in later sections.

Entity Label Offset Definition

Input Offset Value

Define Label Offsets for Selected Entities:

Entity

Minimum Maximum Offset

Reset

Cancel OK

Nodes

Elements

Material Properties

Element Properties

Coordinate Frames

Distributed Load Set IDs

Node Force Load Set IDs

Node Displacement Set IDs

Bar element Init Displacement

1

1

200

200

Automatic Offset

Existing ID Range in Db New ID

Minimum and Maximum IDs currently found in the MSC.Patran database.

ID offset value to be used during import. The new ID value will be the ID found in the NASTRAN input file plus this offset value.

If selected, the value in the Maximum column will be used as the offset for the selected rows.

All offset data boxes can be selected at once by selecting this column header.


Selection of Input FileThis subordinate form appears when the Select Input File button is selected on the Analysis form and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which NASTRAN input file to translate.

Select File

OK Filter Cancel

Filter

Selected Input File

Directories Files

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/. /bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/..

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/clip

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/*.bdf

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/north.bdf

ids.bdf

ids_1.bdf

north.bdf

Summary Data FormThis form appears after the import of the NASTRAN input file has completed. It displays the number of entities imported correctly, imported with warnings, or not imported due to errors. These figures reflect the number of MSC.Patran entities created. In some cases, there is not a one-to-one relation between the original MSC.Nastran entities and the generated MSC.Patran entities. For example, when material orientations on several CQUAD4s are defined using references to varying MCIDs while still referencing the same PID, MSC.Patran needs to create a unique property set for each different MCID reference.

When the OK button is selected, the newly imported data will be committed to the MSC.Patran database, and can not be undone. If there is any question as to whether or not this import was desired, review the graphics data prior to selecting OK on this form. If the import was not correct, select the undo button on the main menu bar before selecting OK on this form.

NASTRAN Input File Import Summary

Reject Cards...

OK

Imported Imported with Warning Not Imported

Nodes

Elements

Coordinate Frames

Materials

Element Properties

Load Sets

Load Cases

MPCs


Reject Card FormDuring import of the NASTRAN input file, some cards types might not be understood by MSC.Patran. Those cards are brought into MSC.Patran in the direct text input data boxes. Selecting the Reject Cards button on the Summary Data form will bring up this Reject Card Form. You can review these cards here.

Only card types not supported by MSC.Patran are sent to the reject card blocks. (This includes comments.) Cards which are otherwise recognized, but can not be imported due to syntax or invalid data errors are not sent to the reject blocks. The rejected cards will have no characters in front of the command name. Commands preceeded by the character $> are used by the MSC/AMS product to allow processing of comment lines.

Direct Text Import

OK

Executive Control Section Bulk Data Section

0.

File Management Section Case Control Section

214

Bulk Data Section

215

101

$

1.213$CBEAM

MPCADD 100 102

0.

◆

◆◆

◆◆

◆◆

5.2 Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input FileThe following sections describe which specific MSC.Nastran card types can currently be read into MSC.Patran.

The MSC.Nastran cards described in this document are the only cards read when importing a NASTRAN input file into MSC.Patran. All non-supported cards will be sent to the appropriate Direct Text Input data box for this job. When errors occur during the import of a supported card type, the card being processed may or may not be imported, depending on the severity of the problem encountered. An error message will be presented regardless of whether or not the offending card is actually imported.

Any references from supported cards to cards that were not imported (either due to not being a supported card type or due to serious import errors) will still be attempted. If this reference is required in MSC.Patran for the card currently being processed, it too will fail to import. For example, if there is a serious error on a GRID card which causes it to not imported, then all elements attached to that GRID will also fail to import.

Partial Decks. This MSC.Patran function can read incomplete MSC.Nastran decks (except where explicitly noted). However, if the BEGIN BULK command is missing, the program can get confused when trying to determine if a particular card belongs to the case control or bulk data. If you experience any difficulties importing a file that does not have a BEGIN BULK command, add one to the top of the file. This should avoid any such confusion.


Coordinate SystemsThe following coordinate system definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.

Referential Integrity. Coordinate systems and GRIDs which are referenced as part of a CORD definition must be in the same input file. If these are not found in the input file, the definition will be rejected.

References to coordinate frames other than for new coordinate frame definitions can be resolved with coordinate frames previously found in the MSC.Patran database.

Chaining. Due to limitations in the MSC.Patran definitions of coordinate systems, chained definitions (definitions based on other coordinate systems or grids) are modified during import. The resulting definitions are equivalent in global space, but are based on global cartesian coordinates rather than GRID references or coordinate locations in other systems. This change is carried through when a new NASTRAN input file is created. All coordinate systems will be created using CORD2 type definitions, and they will all reference global cartesian coordinates. These definitions will be different from, but equivalent to, the original definitions.

Command Comments

CORD1C

CORD1R

CORD1S

References to the GRIDs on these cards are lost. The locations of the referenced GRIDs are extracted, and those locations are used to create the MSC.Patran definition.

CORD2C

CORD2R

CORD2S

References to RIDs are lost. The specified locations are converted to global cartesian for use in the MSC.Patran definitions.The original B and C points are not retained. Their values are recomputed when a new NASTRAN input file is created. The definition will be equivalent, but not identical.

Grids and SPOINTsThe MSC.Nastran GRID card is read fully, except the SEID field. The CD and CP references are both maintained. The PS data is used to create a constraint set. The details of the created load set are defined in the load set import section.

GRDSET data is merged into the GRID data during import. The data will be retained, but will appear directly on the GRID card when a new NASTRAN input file is generated.

SPOINTs. SPOINTs are treated as GRIDs at the global origin. They are assumed to have their GRID CD and CP fields set to the basic system, and their PS field is set to permanently constrain degrees-of-freedom 2 through 6.

Referential Integrity. Coordinate frames referenced in the CP field must exist in the same input file. Coordinate frames referenced on the CD field can exist in either the same input file, or the MSC.Patran database prior to the import.


Elements and Element PropertiesThe following MSC.Nastran elements and element properties can be read into MSC.Patran.

Element Property Property Set Name Comments

CBAR PBAR pbar.<pid> Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import.(See BAROR comments below.)

PBARL pbarl.<pid>

CBARAO New property sets are created for each occurrence of a CBAR card referenced by a CBARAO card

CBEAM Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import.(See BEAMOR comments below.)

PBEAM pbeam.<pid>

PBEAML pbeaml.<pid>

PBCOMP pbcomp.<pid> The MSC.Nastran documentation describes how the section data is used to create a complete set of lumped areas. The data imported into MSC.Patran is fully expanded, and therefore, is different from the data in the original input file. This definition is, however, fully equivalent to the original.The SO field is not currently supported. A YES is provided automatically when a new NASTRAN input file is created.Only the lumped areas definition is understood, If a uniform cross section is defined here, it will be converted to a lumped area definition, but no lumped areas will be defined.

CBEND MSC.Patran only understands the GEOM = 1 orientation data. If other definitions are found, a vector will be computed to convert the definition to the GEOM = 1 format. If a GRID was referenced for GEOM other than 1, that reference will be lost. For the same reasons, the THETAB and RB data will also be lost since that data is not used for GEOM = 1 definitions.Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import.

PBEND pbend_g.<pid> If standard cross section properties are found on the PBEND card

pbend_p.<pid> If the alternate format of the PBEND is used to define a pipe cross section.

CBUSH PBUSH pbush.<pid>

pbush_g.<pid> The grounded form of the PBUSH

PBUSHT pbusht_1D.<pid>

CDAMP1 PDAMP pdamp.<pid> For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs.

pdamp_g.<pid> For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.

CDAMP2 cdamp2 For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs.

cdamp2_g For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.

CDAMP3 PDAMP Treated identical to the CDAMP1 and CDAMP2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX).CDAMP4

CELAS1 PELAS pelas.<pid> For springs connecting 2 GRIDs.

pelas_g.<pid> For grounded springs attached to a single GRID.

CELAS2 celas2 For springs connecting 2 GRIDs.

celas2_g For grounded springs attached to a single GRID.

CELAS3 PELAS Treated identical to the CELAS1 and CELAS2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX).CELAS4

CGAP Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import.

PGAP pgap.<pid> For non-adaptive definitions on the PGAP card.

pgap_a.<pid> For adaptive definitions on the PGAP card.

CHBDYG

CHBDYP

PHBDY Note: The BDYOR command that may contain default values for CHBDY elements is not currently supported.

CHEXA PSOLID psolid.<pid>

CMASS1 PMASS pmass.<pid> For masses connecting 2 GRIDs.

pmass_g.<pid> For masses attached to a single GRID.

CMASS2 cmass2 For masses connecting 2 GRIDs.

cmass2_g For masses attached to a single GRID.

CMASS3 PMASS Treated identical to the CMASS1 and CMASS2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX).CMASS4

CONM1 conm1

CONM2 conm2

CONROD conrod



CPENTA PSOLID psolid.<pid>

CQUAD4 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)

PCOMP pcomp.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced.The SB and FT fields are currently not read.

CQUAD8 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)


CQUADR PSHELL pshellr.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)

PCOMP pcompr.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced.The SB and FT fields are currently not read.

CROD PROD prod.<pid>

CSHEAR PSHEAR pshear.<pid>

CTETRA PSOLID psolid.<pid>

CTRIA3 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)


CTRIA6 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)


CTRIAR PSHELL pshellr.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)

PCOMP pcompr.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced.The SB and FT fields are currently not read.

CTRIAX6 ctriax6

CTUBE PTUBE ptube.<pid> Tapered tubes are converted to an equivalent constant section definition.

CVISC PVISC pvisc.<pid>

PLOTEL Creates the connectivity only. These elements are not assigned to any property set region.PLOTEL cards will not be written when a new input file is created.


Higher order elements (CQUAD8, CTRIA6, CTRIAX6, CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) will generate linear elements in MSC.Patran if none of the mid-edge nodes are specified.

PSHELL Properties. PSHELL properties can be imported as any one of five MSC.Patran property types. The MID1, MID2, MID3, 12I/T3, and TS/T property fields are used to determine which one to choose. If MID2 is -1 and MID3 is 0, then a Plane Strain property set is used. If MID2 and MID3 are both 0, then a Membrane property set is chosen. If MID1 and MID3 are 0, then a Bending property set is used. If MID1, MID2, and MID3 are all the same, and the MSC.Nastran defaults are used for 12I/T3 and TS/T, then a Homogeneous property set is used. If all else fails, then an Equivalent Section property set is chosen.

BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions. The BAROR and BEAMOR data is merged onto the CBAR and CBEAM cards using the proper MSC.Nastran conventions. The data is treated as if it had originally been defined on the CBAR and CBEAM cards. When a new NASTRAN input file is created, the data will remain with the CBAR and CBEAM cards. No BAROR or BEAMOR cards are generated.

Fields. If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the property set, with the name of the specific property word appended to it. For example, if property set “pshell.101” has a varying thickness, the field will be named “pshell.101.Thickness”.

Referential Integrity. Nodes and coordinate frames referenced on elements or element properties must exist, but they do not need to be in the input file. They could also have been defined in the MSC.Patran database prior to the import.

If a material is referenced, but can not be found, a new material with no properties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this material.

If an element property set is referenced, but can not be found, a new property set with no properties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this property set.

Set Name Extensions. In some cases, the data found on the element can not be defined in MSC.Patran in a single property set. In those cases, multiple property sets will be created to define the distinct definitions. The table below defines extensions to the Property Set Names shown in the previous table. If the values on the specified field changes, a new property set with the indicated extension will be created.


If all elements which reference a single PID can be stored in a single property set, then no extension will be added to the Property Set Name.

MaterialsThe following MSC.Nastran material definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.

Element Field Extension Comments

CBAR PAPB

.pa<PA>

.pb<PB>

CBEAM SASBPAPB

.sa<SA>

.sb<SB>

.pa<PA>

.pb<PB>

CDAMP1, CDAMP2,

CELAS1, CELAS2,

CMASS1, CMASS2

C1C2

.ca<C1>

.cb<C2>

CDAMP3, CDAMP4,

CELAS3, CELAS4,

CMASS3, CMASS4

C1C2

.ca1

.cb1These are automatically treated as component 1 (X translation).

CGAP, CONM1, CONM2 CID .c<CID>

CONROD, CTRIAX6 MID .m<MID>

CQUAD4, CQUAD8,

CQUADR, CTRIA3,

CTRIA6, CTRIAR

MCID .c<MCID>

Material Type Material Name Comments

CREEP

MAT1 mat1.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported.If the G field is blank in the input file, the MSC.Nastran default value will be filled in during import.

MATT1

MAT2 mat2.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported.

MATT2

MAT3 mat3.<mid>

MATT3

MPCsThe following MSC.Nastran MPC and rigid element definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.

MPCs in MSC.Patran are treated as elements and are not associated to load cases. As a result, all SUBCASE related data is lost. The MPCs are simply imported into the model and are no longer associated to a specific load case.

MPCs can reference SPOINTs instead of GRIDs. If this is detected, the corresponding component field will be set to 1 (UX) to be consistent with the import of SPOINTs.

The MPCADD command is not read since the MPCs are simply imported and no associated to a load case. The SID references on the MPC card are also lost for the same reason. New MPC IDs are assigned to these elements during import.

MAT4

MATT4

MAT5

MATT5

MAT8 mat8.<mid>

MAT9 mat9.<mid>

MATT9

Card Type MPC Type Comments

MPC Explicit Unique MPC IDs will be assigned to these entities.Since MSC.Patran uses a slightly different basis MPC equation, the equation coefficients (Ai) will probably be scaled by a constant multiplier during import. The resulting equation will be equivalent, but not necessarily identical to the original definition in the NASTRAN input file.

RBAR RBAR

RBE1 RBE1

RBE2 RBE2

Fixed

RBE3 RBE3

RROD RROD

RSPLINE RSPLINE

RSSCON RSSCON

RTRPLT RTRPLT

Material Type Material Name Comments


Load SetsThe following MSC.Nastran Loads and Boundary Condition definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.

Card Type LBC Set Name Comments

FORCE force.<sid>

GRAV grav.<sid>

MOMENT moment.<sid>

PLOAD1 pload1.<sid> Only PLOAD1s applied to the entire length of an element can be read. If a load is applied only to a portion of an element, the load will be ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem.

PLOAD2 pload2.<sid>

PLOAD4 pload4.<sid> Only pressure loads normal to the surface can be imported. If a surface traction is detected, it will be ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem.

PLOADX1 ploadx1.<sid>

CONV conv.<pid>

PCONV

CONVM convm.<pid>

PCONVM

QBDYi qbdyi.<pid>

QVECT qvect.<pid>

QVOL qvol.<pid>

RADBC radbc.<pid>

RADCAV radcav.<pid> Note: ELEAMB field is not supported by MSC.Patran. The ambient element is added to the application region.

RADM

RADMT

RFORCE rforce.<sid> If the G point is not at the origin of the referenced CID, a new CID will be created and referenced.The METHOD field is not read. It is automatically set to 1 when writing a new file.

SLOAD sload.<pid>

TEMP temp.<sid>

Fields. If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the load set, with the name of the specific data word appended to it. For example, if load set “force.101” has a varying force magnitude, the field will be named “force.101.Force”.

Load cases are created in MSC.Patran from the SUBCASE definitions in the NASTRAN input file. Load sets not referenced by a SUBCASE definition are created as load sets in MSC.Patran, but are not associated to a load case. Load sets defined above the first SUBCASE command, plus any permanent single point constraint sets from the GRID cards, are associated to all load cases created during this import. If there is no case control data, then load sets will be created, but they will not be assigned to any load cases.

The SPCADD and LOAD cards are used in creating load cases in MSC.Patran, but the SID of these cards is lost. The SIDs on the individual SPCx, FORCE, MOMENT, GRAV, PLOADx, RFORCE, and TEMPx cards are used in creating the names of the load sets.

The name for the created load cases is derived from the subtitle of the SUBCASE. This is done for consistency with the forward PAT3NAS translation.

A job is created during the import. The name of the created job is the basename of the file being read.

MSC.Nastran allows load sets to be referenced in multiple places with different scale factors. This is not possible in MSC.Patran. Therefore, in some cases, multiple copies of the same load set need to be created with the only difference being the scale factor. The name of these load sets are modified to include the subcase ID to create unique names.

TEMPP1 tempp1.<sid> Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient data fields are used. The specified temperatures at the Z1 and Z2 locations are ignored.

TEMPRB temprb.<sid> Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient data fields are used. The specified temperatures at the stress recovery locations are ignored.

GRID grid.ps

SPC spc.<sid>

SPCADD

SPC1 spc1.<sid>

SPCD spcd.<sid> The required SPC or SPC1 entries for the same Degree-of-Freedom are removed from the load case when a SPCD is found. They will automatically be re-generated when a new input file is created.

VIEW

VIEW3D

Card Type LBC Set Name Comments


TABLESThe following table types are supported during import of a NASTRAN input file. Note that some forms of the table commands are converted to an equivalent version supported by Patran.

Card Type Field Name Comments

TABLED1 Field.<tid>

TABLED2 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP.

TABLED3 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP.

TABLEM1 Field.<tid>

TABLEM2 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP.

TABLEM3 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP.

5.3 Conflict ResolutionIf an entity can not be imported into MSC.Patran because another entity already exists with that ID or name, then the conflict resolution logic is used. There are 2 different approaches taken, depending on whether the entity is identified by an ID or by a name.

Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDsIf a new definition conflicts with a definition already in the MSC.Patran database, you will be asked if you want the ID of the new definition offset. If you select YES, a new ID will be chosen. If you select YES FOR ALL, a new ID will be chosen for this definition, as well as for any others found to be in conflict. In this case, then all references to the ID in the original MSC.Patran database will still reference the old ID, but references to the ID from within the input file will be altered to reference the new ID.

If you do not want the CID to be offset, then you will be asked if you want the new definition to overwrite the existing definition. If this is done, then all references to this ID from both the original MSC.Patran database and the input file will be referencing the same ID. The definition for that ID will be either the old or the new definition, depending on how this second question is answered.

Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by NamesThe user is not asked what to do in cases where the conflicting entities are identified by names. The name for the new entity will be modified by appending an extension to the name. The new name will be “<old name>.r<n>”. The value of n is chosen to make the new name unique.

No merging of data or application regions is done. The old definition is left unchanged.


CHAPTER

6 Delete

■ Review of Delete Form

■ Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job

6.1 Review of Delete FormThe Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen and the selected Action is Delete.

The Delete option under Action allows the user to delete jobs that have been created for the MSC.Nastran preference.

MSC.Patran

hp, 2




Viewing

Analysis

DeleteAction:

JobObject:

Code:

Type:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Delete Jobs

3CHAPTER 6Delete

6.2 Deleting an MSC.Nastran JobThis format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Delete. The user may delete job definitions that were created for the MSC.Nastran preference with this form.


List of already existing jobs. Select the jobs that are to be deleted.

Analysis

Delete Action:

Job Object:

Code:

Type:

MSC.Nastran

Structural

Existing Jobs

Apply

Deletes the jobs selected in the Existing Jobs listbox.


CHAPTER

7 Files

■ Files

7.1 FilesThe MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface uses or creates several files.The following table outlines each file and its uses. In the file name definition, jobname will be replaced with the jobname assigned by the user.

File Name Description

*.db This is the MSC.Patran database. During an analyze pass, model data is read from this database and, during a Read Results pass, model and/or results data is written into it. This file typically resides in the current directory.

jobname.jbr These are small files used to pass certain information between MSC.Patran and the independent translation programs during translation. There should never be a need to directly alter these files. These files typically reside in the current directory.

jobname.bdf This is the NASTRAN input file created by the interface. This file typically resides in the current directory.

msc_v#_sol#.alt These are a series of MSC.Nastran alters that are read during forward translation. These alters instruct MSC.Nastran to write information to the OUTPUT2 file that the results translation will be looking for. The forward translator searches the MSC.Patran file path for these files, but they typically reside in the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files do not meet specific needs, edit them accordingly. However, the naming conversion of msc_v# <version #>_sol#<solution #>.alt must be preserved. Either place the edited file back into the <installation_directory>/alters directory or in any directory on the MSC.Patran file path, which takes precedence over the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files are not used, remove them from the MSC.Patran file path, rename them, or delete them altogether.

jobname.op2 This is the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file, which is read by the Read Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains both model and results data. It is created by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the input deck.

jobname.xdb This is the MSC.Nastran XDB file or MSC.Access database, which is attached by the Read Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains results data. It is created by placing a PARAM, POST,0 in the input deck.

jobname.flat This file may be generated during a Read Results pass. If the results translation cannot write data directly into the specified MSC.Patran database it will create this jobname flat file. This file typically resides in the current directory.

3CHAPTER 7Files

jobname.msg.xx These message files contain any diagnostic output from the translation, either forward or reverse. This file typically resides in the current directory.

MscNastranExecute This is a UNIX script file, which is called on to submit MSC.Nastran after translation is complete. This file might need customizing with site specific data, such as, host machine name and MSC.Nastran executable commands. This file contains many comments and should be easy to edit. MSC.Patran searches its file path to find this file, but it typically resides in the <installation_directory> bin/exe directory. Either use the general copy in <installation_directory>/bin/exe, or place a local copy in a directory on the file path, which takes precedence over the <installation_directory>/bin/exe directory.

File Name Description


CHAPTER

8 Errors/Warnings

■ Errors/Warnings

8.1 Errors/WarningsThere are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface. The following table outlines some of these.

Message Description

Unable to open a new message file " ". Translation messages will be written to standard output.

If the translation tries to open a message file and cannot, it will write messages to Standard Output. On most systems, the translator automatically writes messages to standard output and never tries to create a separate message file.

Unable to open the specified OUTPUT2 file " ".

The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file.

The specified OUTPUT2 file " " is not in standard binary format and cannot be translated.

The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary format. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file.

Group " " does not exist in the database. Model data will not be translated.

The name of a nonexistent group was specified in the translator control file. No model data will be translated from the OUTPUT2 file.

Needed file specification missing! The full name of the job file must be specified as the first command-line argument to this program.

The translation control file must be specified as the first on-line argument to the translator.

Unable to open the specified database " ". Writing the OUTPUT2 information to the PCL command file " ".

If the translator cannot communicate directly to the specified database. It will write the results and/or model data to a PCL session file.

Unable to open either the specified database " ", or a PCL command file, " ".

The naspat3 translator is unable to open any output file. Check file specification and directory protection.

Unable to open the NASTRAN input file " ".

The translator was unable to open a file to where the input file information will be written.

Unable to open the specified database, " " .

The forward MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran translator was unable to open the specified MSC.Patran database.

Alter file of the name " " could not be found. No OUPUT2 alter will be written to the NASTRAN input file.

The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of analysis, could not be found. Correct the search path to include the necessary directory if you want the alter files to be written to the input file.

No property regions are defined in the database. No elements or element properties can be translated.

Elements referenced by an element property region in the MSC.Patran database will not get translated by the forward MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran translator. If no element regions are defined, no elements will be translated.


CHAPTER

A Preference Configuration and Implementation

■ Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran

■ MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components

■ Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File

A.1 Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.NastranThe MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran product includes the following items:

• A PCL function contained in p3patran.plb that will add MSC.Nastran specific definitions to any MSC.Patran database (not already containing such definitions) at any time.

• A PCL library called mscnastran.plb and contained in the <installation_directory> directory. This library is used by the analysis forms to produce forms for analysis code specific translation parameter, solution parameter, etc.

• A script file called MscNastranExecute, contained in the <installation_directory>/bin/exe directory. This script controls the operation of the interface and the submission of MSC.Nastran analyses. This script can be run independent of MSC.Patran but typically run from within MSC.Patran, transparent to the user.

• Several MSC.Nastran alter files are included. These files are used when creating the NASTRAN input file. They ask MSC.Nastran to produce the results file required by the NASPAT3 results translator. These files can be found in the <installation_directory>/alter directory. They must follow the naming convention msc_v<version_number>_sol<solution_number>.alt. For example, msc_v67_sol3.alt. If these files do not meet the user’s needs, they should be modified. Alter files specific to LMS CADA-X are also included. These files are identical to the standard alter files except for an additional “.lms” extension, e.g., msc_v67_sol3.alt.lms. These files are usually needed only when the user requires support for older solution sequences.

• This MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface Manual is included as part of the product. An on-line version is also provided to allow the direct access to this information from within MSC.Patran.

3CHAPTER APreference Configuration and Implementation

A.2 MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference ComponentsThe diagrams shown below indicate how the functions, scripts, programs, and files that constitute the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface affect the MSC.Patran environment. Site customization, in some cases, is indicated.

Figure A-1 shows the process of running an analysis. The mscnastran.plb library defines the Translation Parameter, Solution Type, Solution Parameter, and Output Request forms called by the Analysis form. When the Apply button is pushed on the Analyze form, the interface process is initiated. The interface reads data from the database and creates the NASTRAN input file. Status messages from the interface are recorded in the MSC.Patran session file. A series of MSC.Nastran alter files is provided. They may be used during the creation of the input file depending upon the selected solution type and solution parameters. These alter files are mostly used in support of older solution sequences. If the interface successfully produces a NASTRAN input file, and the user requests it, the MscNastranExecute script will then start MSC.Nastran.

Figure A-1 Forward Translation

MSC.Patran

Analyze mscnastran.plb

MscNastranExecute

Alter Library

MSC.Patran Database

jobname.bdf MSC.Nastran

Analysis p3patran.plb

Figure A-2 shows the process of reading information from an MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file. When the Apply button is selected on the Read Output2 form, a <jobname>.jbr file is created and the results translation is started. The results interface process reads the data from the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file and stores the results in the MSC.Patran database. Status messages from the interface are recorded in the MSC.Patran session file.

Figure A-2 OUTPUT2 File Translation

MSC.Patran

Read Output2

MSC.Patran database

MSC.Nastran

jobname.jbr

jobname.OP2

mscnastran.plb

p3patran.plb

Analysis

3CHAPTER APreference Configuration and Implementation

Figure A-3 shows the process of translating information from a NASTRAN input file into a MSC.Patran database. The behavior of the main Analysis/Read Input File form and the subordinate file select form is dictated by the mscnastran.plb PCL library. The Apply button on the main form activates the input file reader program, which reads the specified NASTRAN input file.

Figure A-3 NASTRAN Input File Translation

NASTRAN

MSC.Patran

Read Input File

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Input

mscnastran.plb

p3patran.plb Analysis

Input File

database

input_file_name.error.*

File Reader

A.3 Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute FileDuring the installation of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran analysis preference, the mscsetup utility creates a default site_setup file in the installation directory. This file sets environment variables relating to MSC.Patran. To custom configure this site_setup file consult Environment Variables (p. 94) in the MSC.Patran Installation and Operations Guide.

3

I N D E XMSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis

I N D E XMSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference

Guide Volume 1: Structural

Analysis

Aalternate reduction, 183, 257ALTERS, 344Alters, 176ALTRED, 183, 257analysis coordinate frames, 17analysis form, 173analysis job definition, 175analysis job submittal, 175analysis preferences, 6analyze, 172AUTOSPC, 183

Bbuckling, 194bulk data, 9bulk data file, 312

Ccase control, 8CBAR, 77CBEAM, 80, 88, 90CBEND, 84, 86CDAMP1, 73, 102CELAS1, 72, 101CGAP, 104CHEXA, 140CMASS1, 69, 106complex Eigenvalue, 198CONM1, 67CONM2, 70coordinate frames, 15, 284

analysis, 17reference, 17

coordinates, 177COUPMASS, 184, 190CPENTA, 140CQUAD4, 111, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120,

122, 125, 128, 131, 132, 135, 136

CQUAD8, 111, 116, 118, 125, 131, 135CQUADR, 127creep, 52, 53CROD, 98, 99CSHEAR, 139CTETRA, 140CTRIA3, 111, 114, 116, 118, 122, 125, 128, 131,

135CTRIA6, 111, 116, 118, 125, 131, 135CTRIAR, 113, 117, 120, 127, 132, 136CTRIAX6, 130CTUBE, 100CVISC, 103CYAX, 32cyclic symmetry, 21, 32, 183, 194, 203, 257CYJOIN, 32CYSYM, 32

Ddegrees-of-freedom, 22DISPLACEMENT, 235displacements, 155, 158distributed load, 155dynamic reduction, 188, 193DYNRED, 193

EECHO, 184EIGB, 196EIGC, 201Eigenvalue extraction, 188, 194

buckling, 196complex, 201real, 191

EIGR, 191EIGRL, 196elastoplastic, 46, 47, 48, 49element properties, 63

INDEX

elements, 2842d solid, 131, 132axisymmetric solid, 130coupled point mass, 67curved general section, 84curved pipe, 86gap, 104general section beam, 77general section rod, 98, 99general section(cbeam), 93grounded scalar damper, 73grounded scalar mass, 69grounded scalar spring, 72lumped area beam, 88lumped point mass, 70p-formulation, 11, 141P-Formulation bending panel, 128P-Formulation Equivalent Section plate,

122P-Formulation general section beam, 80P-Formulation homogeneous plate, 114P-Formulation Membrane, 137P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid, 133pipe section, 100plotel, 107revised bending panel, 127revised equivalent section plate, 120revised homogeneous plate, 113revised laminate plate, 117revised membrane, 136revised plane strain solid, 132scalar damping, 102scalar mass, 106scalar spring, 101shear panel, 139solid, 140standard bending panel, 125standard equivalent section plate, 118standard homogeneous plate, 111standard laminate plate, 116standard membrane, 135standard plane strain solid, 131tapered beam, 90viscous damper, 103

ELSDCON, 235errors, 342ESE, 235executive control, 8

Ffailure, 55, 56, 57

criteria, 50, 51FEEDGE, 11FEFACE, 12files, 338finite elements, 16, 18FMS, 8follower forces, 186FORCE, 159, 235force, 155, 159formats, 177frequency response, 203

GGEOM1, 284GEOM2, 284GMBC, 12GPFORCE, 235GRAV, 163GRDPNT, 185, 190

IINCLUDE files, 177inertia relief, 183, 257inertial load, 163initial conditions, 155, 164initial load, 155initial velocity, 155input file, 312INREL, 183, 257iterations

static nonlinear, 216

KK6ROT, 184

Llarge displacements, 186LGDISP, 187linear static, 183linear surf-vol, 19linear transient, 206load cases, 167loads and boundary conditions, 153

3INDEX

MMAT1, 50, 51MAT3, 58MAT8, 54, 55, 56, 57materials, 36

2D anisotropic, 39, 592D orthotropic, 39, 543D anisotropic, 40, 603D orthotropic, 39, 58composite, 41, 61isotropic, 38, 42

MATS1, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49MATT1, 50MAXLINES, 184model data, 273MOMENT, 159MPC, 19, 23, 33MSC.Access, 176, 270MSC.Nastran version, 177, 273multi-point constraints, 19

NNLLOAD, 235NLPARM, 216nodes, 17, 177, 284nonlinear elastic, 43nonlinear statics, 186nonlinear transient, 209normal nodes, 188numbering options, 178

OOEF1, 277, 278OESNL1, 278OLOAD, 235ONRGY1, 279OPG1, 280OPHIG, 280OPNL1, 280optimize, 254

optimization parameters, 255subcase create, 256subcase parameters, 257subcase select optimize, 258

OSTR1, 277, 278OUGV1, 280output requests, 231OUTPUT2, 176, 270, 271

OUTRCV, 13

PPARAM, SNORM, 184, 190, 199, 204, 207PBAR, 77PBCOMP, 88PBEAM, 80, 90PBEND, 84, 86PCOMP, 51, 56, 57, 61, 116, 117PDAMP, 73, 102PELAS, 72, 101PGAP, 104PLOAD4, 159PLOADX1, 159PMASS, 69, 106POINT, 11preferences, 6pressure, 155, 159PROD, 98properties, 63PSHEAR, 139PSHELL, 111, 113, 118, 120, 125, 127, 131,

132, 135, 136PSOLID, 140PTUBE, 100PVISC, 103

RRBAR, 20, 25RBE1, 20, 26RBE2, 20, 24, 27RBE3, 20, 28read input file, 312reference coordinate frames, 17results, 270, 271, 274

supported entities, 277, 285RFORCE, 163RROD, 21, 29RSPLINE, 21, 30RSSCON, 19RTRPLT, 21, 31

Ssliding surface, 21, 33

INDEX

solution parameters, 183SOL 109, 206SOL 112, 206SOL 27, 206SOL 31, 206

solution sequencesSOL 1, 180, 183SOL 101, 180, 183SOL 103, 180SOL 105, 180, 194SOL 106, 180, 186SOL 107, 198SOL 108, 180, 203SOL 109, 180SOL 110, 180, 198SOL 111, 180, 203SOL 112, 180SOL 114, 180, 183SOL 115, 180SOL 118, 180, 203SOL 129, 180, 209SOL 147, 180SOL 26, 180, 203SOL 27, 180SOL 28, 180, 198SOL 29, 180, 198SOL 3, 180SOL 30, 180, 203SOL 37, 180SOL 47, 180, 183SOL 48, 180SOL 5, 180, 194SOL 66, 180, 186SOL 77, 180, 194SOL 99, 180, 209

solution types, 180SPC1, 158SPCD, 158SPCFORCES, 235static data, 156STRAIN, 235STRESS, 235structural damping, 199, 208, 210supported entities, 8

TTEMP, 161temperature, 155, 161TEMPP1, 162TEMPRB, 161

TIC, 164TIME, 184time dependent, 157tolerances, 176, 273, 276translation parameters, 176, 273, 276TSTEPNL, 219

VVECTOR, 235VU mesh, 13

Wwarnings, 342WTMASS, 184, 190

XXDB, 176, 270, 274

Documents

MSC - MSC Patran MSC Nastran Preference Guide - Volume 1 - Structural Analysis [MSC]